Traductori de Proximitate PX PDF

Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
2/2 2/4
2/6 2/8 2/9
Introduction IO-Link proximity switches

SIMATIC PXS310C M18 IO-Link master IO-Link I/O modules
2/95
2/97 2/99 2/100 2/101 2/103 2/105 2/108 2/110 2/112 2/114 2/116 2/119 2/120 2/123 2/125
SIMATIC PXO300
K21, K21 R designs K20 design L20 design C20 design K31 design K30 design C40 design L50 design L50 HF, L50HF advanced designs C50 design K80 design L80HF design SIMATIC PXO650 L90L SIMATIC PXO830 GL SIMATIC PXO840 LV70
2/216 SIMATIC PXI400

2/217 2/223 2/226 Operating distance 110 mm Operating distance 1220 mm Operating distance 2575 mm ATEX, 28 mm ATEX, 1035 mm e1, 28 mm e1, 1015 mm Operating distance 3 mm, explosion-proof to 500 bar Operating distance 0 to 6 mm with analog output
2/102 SIMATIC PXO400 2/107 SIMATIC PXO500
2/10 2/17
2/18 2/20 2/22
SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches SIMATIC PXS100

K0 compact range 3SG16 compact form Sonar thru-beam sensor

2/230 2/232 2/234 2/237 2/240

2/241
2/24
2/27 2/31 2/34 2/36
SIMATIC PXS200
M30 K1 compact range M18S compact range K21 compact range K08 compact form
2/115 SIMATIC PXO600
2/38
2/40 2/44 2/46
SIMATIC PXS300
M30 K2 compact range M18 compact range K65 compact form
2/122 SIMATIC PXO800 2/127 Schematics 2/128 Characteristic curves 2/132 SIMATIC PXI inductive proximity switches 2/138 SIMATIC PXI200
2/140 2/143 2/157 2/164 2/169 Operating distance 0.60.8 mm Operating distance 14 mm Operating distance 510 mm Operating distance 1520 mm Operating distance 3040 mm Operating distance 0.61 mm Operating distance 24 mm Operating distance 512 mm Operating distance 1522 mm Operating distance 2540 mm Operating distance 5065 mm
2/242 Schematics 2/245 Characteristic curves 2/254 SIMATIC PXC capacitive proximity switch 2/256 SIMATIC PXC200
2/257 2/259 10 to 65 V DC 20 to 250 V AC
2/49
2/50
SIMATIC PXS400
M30 K3 compact range
2/55
2/56 2/58
SIMATIC PXS800
M18 ATEX compact range M30 K3 ATEX compact range
2/260 Accessories
2/260 2/262 2/263 2/266 2/268 2/274 2/275 2/276 2/277 SONPROG programming device for SIMATIC PXS Distributors Plastic fiber-optic wire for SIMATIC PXO Reflectors for SIMATIC PXO Plug-in connections Sensor assembly system Mounting hardware for all proximity switches Mounting hardware for SIMATIC PXS Mounting hardware for SIMATIC PXO
2/62
2/63
SIMATIC PXS900
Double-layer sheet monitoring
2/65 2/66 2/78 2/85

2/86 2/87 2/88
Schematics Characteristic curves (Sound cones) SIMATIC PXO photoelectric proximity switches SIMATIC PXO100
D4 design M5 design M12 design

2/172 2/173 2/184 2/196 2/206 2/215
2/90
2/91 2/93 2/94
SIMATIC PXO200
M18S design M18 design L18 design
Siemens FS10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Introduction
Proximity switches for reliable sensing, counting, measurement or monitoring

Automation solutions are becoming more and more extensive and processes are more complex than ever before. Therefore the seamless control of all processes is more important than ever. To maintain an overview here, it is essential to deploy all the available senses optimally.
Highlights
Contactless detection of objects Extensive and complete product range including photoelectric, inductive, sonar and capacitive sensors International versions (UL/CSA) Up to degree of protection IP69K, depending on type of sensor Customer-specific product versions Integrated in Totally Integrated Automation with IO-Link
Proximity switches offer ideal characteristics for this for sensing, counting, measuring and positioning. Whatever the application or sector, the complete product range can always provide just the right feel for the job.
SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches

Sonar proximity switches can be used as non-contact proximity switches in many fields of automation. Whenever distances through air have to be evaluated, these devices can be used, because they not only detect objects, but can also output and evaluate the absolute distance between the Sonar proximity switches and the object. Changing environmental conditions (e.g. temperature variations) are compensated during evaluation of the measurement.
SIMATIC PXO photoelectric proximity switches

The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected. Depending on the type of device, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated.
SIMATIC PXI inductive proximity switches

Inductive proximity switches are the low-cost solution for non-contact detection of metal objects. Inductive proximity switches are extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to no-wear operation as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water.
SIMATIC PXC capacitive proximity switches

Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors for measuring conducting and non-conducting materials in solid, powder or liquid state.
2/2
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Introduction
Totally integrated in TIA

IO-Link is the smart concept for the standardized linking of sensors and actuators to the control levels by means of an economical point-to-point connection. This new communications standard below the fieldbus level allows central fault diagnosis and location as far as the sensor/ actuator level and simplifies commissioning and maintenance by allowing the parameter data to be modified dynamically, direct from the PLC. The result: Greater plant availability and reduced engineering expenditure. As an open interface, the IO-Link can be integrated into all common fieldbus and open automation systems. Consistent interoperability ensures maximum protection of investment.
Engineering
Reduced engineering costs
Faster configuration due to central data storage and reproducibility of sensor and actuator parameters. Reduced number of parameterization tools due to central configuration and data storage in STEP 7. Simpler integration of devices by defining profiles. Maximum flexibility: thanks to the open IO-Link solution with IODD Standard, third-party devices can be integrated analogously by means of GSD. Protection of investment by means of tried and tested topologies and compatibility with conventional connection.
Commissioning
Shorter commissioning times
Homogeneous and significantly reduced wiring expenditure of different sensors and actuators by the use of standardized, shielded 3-wire connecting cables. Saves time, as no individual parameterization is necessary. Parameters can be copied for similar device configurations. Uncomplicated parameterization due to central data storage recurrent default settings at sensors and actuators are avoided. High degree of flexibility for sensor/ actuator parameterization thanks to optional editing or teaching of setting data.
Operation and maintenance

Greater plant availability
Transparency down to the field level due to the integration of the IO-Link Standard into Totally Integrated Automation. Shorter conversion times thanks to central parameter and recipe management for field devices as well. Reduced downtimes due to plant-wide diagnostics all the way to the field level and fast fault clearing and thanks to reporting and displaying pre-failure messages by means of preventive maintenance of sensors and actuators. Easy clearance of faults by replacing equipment with supported re-parameterizing, because integrated parameter storage is provided in the PLC. Absolute reliability of all of the Siemens components in the Siemens system due to comprehensive system tests.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/3
Siemens AG 2008
IO-Link proximity switches

IO-Link
Introduction
I Overview
Integration in STEP 7
Integration of the device configuration in the STEP 7 environment ensures Easy and quick engineering Consistent data management Quick locating and clearing of faults Thus productivity is increased in all phases of the plants life cycle configuration, commissioning and operation. With the Siemens IO-Link solution, even sensors and actuators below the fieldbus level are optimally integrated with their complete performance capability in the Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) environment.
I Benefits
The IO-Link system offers decisive advantages when connecting complex (intelligent) sensors/actuators: Dynamic modification of sensor/actuator parameters direct in the PLC Capability of replacing devices during operation without reparameterization due to integrated storage of parameters Rapid commissioning thanks to central data management Integrated diagnostic information down to the sensor/actuator level Uniform wiring and considerably reduced wiring overhead for different sensors/actuators Reduced number of parameterization tools Integrated communication: Transfer of process data and service data between sensors/actuators and the controller Uniform and transparent configuration and programming due to the use of a parameterization tool (Port Configurator Tool, PCT) integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Transparent display of all parameter and diagnostics data Reduced configuration and commissioning costs Alarm and message displays for preventive maintenance
IO-Link product range
IO-Link is a new, innovative and standardized communication standard for sensors and actuators defined by PROFIBUS International (PI). The IO-Link technology is based on a point-topoint connection of sensors and actuators to the controller. It is not a bus system but it considerably enhances the conventional point-to-point connection. In addition to the cyclic operating data, comprehensive parameter and diagnostics data are transferred for the connected sensors/actuators. The same 3-wire connecting cable as currently used for standard sensors is used.
Components of an IO-Link system:

Only 2 components are required for using IO-Link: IO-Link master IO-Link device (e.g. IO-Link sensor/actuator, IO-Link I/O module)
Compatibility of IO-Link
IO-Link ensures the compatibility between IO-Link-capable and standard modules as follows: IO-Link sensors/actuators can be operated both on IO-Link modules (master) and on standard I/O modules. Both IO-Link sensors/actuators as well as current standard sensors/actuators can be used on IO-Link modules (master). If conventional components are used in the IO-Link system, naturally only the standard functions are available in this case.
I Application
There are two main fields of application for IO-Link. On the one hand, even complex sensors with a large number of parameters can be easily connected to the controller by means of IO-Link. On the other hand, by means of the IO-Link modules this technology turns into an optimum substitute for passive distributors when connecting binary sensors. In both fields of application all diagnostics data are transferred to the higher-level controller via IO-Link.
Expansion by IO-Link I/O modules

The compatibility of IO-Link also permits the connection of standard sensors/actuators, i.e. conventional sensors/actuators can also be connected to IO-Link. This can be implemented especially cost-effectively with IO-Link I/O modules that permit the connection of several sensors/actuators to the controller via one cable.
User benefit (example)

If a complex pressure transducer is used, numerous parameters (e.g. threshold values, hysteresis values) are set during commissioning to ensure smooth operation of the plant. Via IO-Link this data is transferred to the controller and stored there. Should this sensor fail, the sensor simply needs to be replaced. The required parameters are then called from the controller and transferred to the sensor via IO-Link. Without IO-Link, the sensor would have to be laboriously reparameterized on site.
Analog signals
Another advantage of the IO-Link technology is that analog signals are immediately digitized in the IO-Link sensor and then digitally transferred via the IO-Link communication. This avoids interferences and additional overhead due to cable shields is omitted.
2/4
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

IO-Link
Introduction
I Integration
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/5
Siemens AG 2008

IO-Link
SIMATIC PXS310C M18 sonar proximity switches
I Overview I Technical specifications
Type
Sensing range Standard target Operational voltage (DC) cm cm V mA mA kHz Hz ms mm
6GR6333-3KS00
10 ... 100 2x2 20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 200 Max. 50 200 5 100 120 1 Yellow/green LED Nickel-plated brass; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 C C -25 +70 -40 +85
Rated operating current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f ON-delay Path resolution Switching status display Enclosure material SIMATIC PXS310C ultrasonic proximity switch
Time delay before availability tv ms
The SIMATIC PXS310C ultrasonic proximity switch can detect many different objects and signal their distance with millimeter precision. Material and color play no role. Due to the bidirectional IO-Link interface, the distance data is provided direct as numerical value without complex analog conversion. The sensor can then be easily parameterized from the controller. The IO-Link interface also transfers diagnostic information from the sensor to the controller. The proximity switch is connected to the IO-Link master via a standard M12 connecting cable. If the proximity switch is connected to a standard I/O module, it operates as proximity switch with switching output. Characteristics M18 compact range Small blind zone Large sensing range up to 100 cm Simple connection method: M12 connector 4-pole, type F Supports COM and SIO mode according to the IO-Link specification Transfer of measured value and switching state Faster transfer of measured values to the controller Dynamic change of the parameters
Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage
I Design
The devices of the M18 IO-Link compact range are always supplied with permanently installed sensors.
2/6
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

IO-Link
SIMATIC PXS310C M18 sonar proximity switches
I Selection and Ordering data
Sensing range cm
10 ... 100
PXS310C ultrasonic proximity switch
Rated operational current mA

200
Order No.
} A
6GR6 333-3KS00
2
} Preferred type, available from stock. A: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H.
I Dimensions
M 18x1
104 (-3) 65
NSD00775
LED (4x)
I Schematics
FS10_00319
SW 24 90,5
1 2 3
L+ XI L-
View from rear onto device
U
NC
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
Communication / Switching output
I More information
Information on the IO-Link sensors can be found in the Mall at www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/7
Siemens AG 2008

IO-Link
IO-Link master
I Overview
IO-Link master
IO-Link master module for SIMATIC ET 200S

The electronic module 4SI IO-Link is an IO-Link master and permits the easy integration of sensors and actuators from different manufacturers into the multifunctional, distributed I/O system SIMATIC ET 200S at a total of four ports.
Characteristics
Up to 4 IO-Link devices (3-wire connection) can be connected to each IO-Link master module. Up to 4 standard actuators or encoders (2-wire/3-wire connection) can be connected. The electronic module 4SI IO-Link is 15 mm wide and can be used with the following universal terminal modules: - TM-E15S26-A1 (screw terminal) - TM-E15C26-A1 (spring-loaded terminal) - TM-E15N26-A1 (Fast Connect) Supports firmware update (as of STEP 7 V5.4 SP4)

IO-Link master module
A
Order No.
6ES7 138-4GA50-0AB0
Electronic module fr ET 200S, 4SI IO-Link, 4 point-to-point interfaces, 15 mm width, IO-Link master
A: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H.
I More information
Further information and technical data can be found in the Mall under: "Communication/Networks" --> "Industrial Communication SIMATIC Net" --> "IO-Link" --> "Master"
2/8
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

IO-Link
I Overview
Transfer of parameters and diagnostic messages
IO-Link I/O modules
IO-Link I/O modules also permit the transfer of parameters and diagnostic messages. For example, the inputs of the modules can be parameterized as NC or NO contacts via IO-Link. An overload or short circuit in the sensor supply is signaled via the IO-Link master to the controller.
M8 and M12 connections

M8 and M12 connections are available for connecting the sensors. A standard M12 connecting cable is used for connection to the IO-Link master.
The IO-Link technology also permits the connection of standard sensors to the IO-Link master. However, such a direct connection of standard sensors to the IO-Link master does not tap the full potential of IO-Link. The technology of the IO-Link modules provides a solution here. Their use represents a more cost-effective solution compared to a direct sensor/actuator connection. IO-Link I/O modules are a practical extension of the ET200S distributed I/O. The technology of the IO-Link I/O modules extends the IO-Link beyond a pure point-to-point connection and creates distributed structures. It must be considered that the cable length of an IO-Link connection restricts the distance between an IO-Link module and the master to max. 20 m. No passive distributors are used and therefore there is no associated laborious and fault-prone wiring.
Technology with IO-Link I/O modules

Type
Pin assignment
Connection method
Order No.
IO-Link module K20

4 inputs 8 inputs Y Standard M12 M8
} }
3RK5 010-0BA10-0AA0 3RK5 010-0CA00-0AAA
} Preferred type, available from stock.
I More information
Further information and technical data are available in the Mall under "Communication/Networks" --> "Industrial Communication SIMATIC NET" --> "IO-Link" --> "I/O Modules"
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/9
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Sonar proximity switches from 2.5 cm to 10 m they hear everything
PXS series
The ultrasonic proximity switches are organized in different product families in accordance with their technical version and design:
SIMATIC sensors Design PXS100 K0 compact range, 3SG16 compact form,

sonar thru-beam sensor
PXS200 PXS300 PXS400 PXS800 PXS900
M30 K1 compact range, M18S compact range, K21 compact range, K08 compact form M30 K2 compact range, M18 compact range, K65 compact form M30 K3 compact range M18 compact range ATEX, M30 K3 compact range ATEX Double-layer sheet monitoring
I Application
The Sonar proximity switches detect objects in different materials, shapes, colors or consistencies with absolute precision, flexibility and reliability. The range of applications is almost limitless. In fill-level or height sensing, distance measurement or bottle counting at distances from 2.5 cm to 10 m, they detect objects with widely differing characteristics. Regardless of whether they are liquid, solid, powder or even transparent. The nature of the surfaces is irrelevant, they can be rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry. The proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration, ambient light or ambient noise. The wide range of areas of application for the Sonar proximity switch ultrasonic sensors gives full rein to the imagination: Fill level and height sensing Spacing measurement Winding diameter sensing Bottle counting, and much more. The Sonar proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration and ambient noise.
Applications in food processing

For use in contact with food or corrosive chemicals, on request, the ultrasonic sensors can be protected with transformer cover foil and supplied in a stainless-steel enclosure.
Highlights
Measurement accurate to the millimeter Color and material-independent, even transparent objects Individual parameter setting Small, compact enclosures (K21) Very high degree of repeat accuracy Can be used all over the world: UL/CSA approvals Sensors available for Ex Zone 2/22 Insensitive to temperature, noise, light or water Sensors with IO-Link
Objects
Using ultrasonic technology, Sonar proximity switches can detect objects of any kind, this includes liquids, powders or granulates, and colored or transparent objects. Whether the surface of the object is rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry is of no consequence. Even at a maximum operating distance, all level or smooth surfaces can be reliably detected up to an angular variation of approximately 3 from the sound cone. Depending on the peak-to-valley height of the object, the angular variation may also be higher. As a rule, the objects can enter the sound cone from any direction.
Configurator
A configurator for sonar proximity switches is available in the Mall. Based on the technical features required, the desired product can be quickly and easily selected, placed in the shopping cart and ordered. The configurator can be reached by the following link: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Sensors for Ex Zone 2/22

These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Guideline 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII
The approval is for: Gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and Dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X The functionality of the sonar proximity switches with ATEX approval is identical to that of the standard proximity switches.
Personal safety
Due to their physical characteristics, the ultrasonic proximity switches cannot be used for safety-related applications (e.g. for the protection of personnel).
NSD0_00801
2/10
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Application examples
2
Size measurement Quality control
Measurement of stack height
Distance monitoring
Measurement of diameter and speed
Level measurements
Contour measurement
Loop monitoring
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/11
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Design
Mounting
Sonar proximity switches can be operated in any mounting position. Mounting positions in which deposits can settle on the transducer surface must however be avoided.
Clearance a around the axis of the sound cone: keep space free of objects
The best results are obtained if the Sonar proximity switches are aligned such that the ultrasound waves hit the object as near to the vertical as possible. If this is not possible (e.g. in the case of bulk material), the maximum possible range must be determined experimentally. This depends on the material, surface and alignment of the objects. To prevent undesirable reflections, the distance a must be maintained from disturbing objects around the axis of the sound cone. Between the sound cone axis and a smooth wall running in parallel to it, the distance b must be maintained to prevent disturbing reflections. The distance c must be maintained to ensure that no objects enter the blind zone (see sound cones).
a a
Sound cone
NSD00748a
Sonar proximity switch
Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000
cm > 6 > 30 > 60 > 90 > 150
Distance b between two Sonar proximity switches and a smooth surface

Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000 b
Sound cone
Mounting multiple sensors

Mutual interference between Sonar proximity switches that can result in spurious signals is excluded by maintaining sufficient distances between the sensors or an appropriate alignment. If two Sonar proximity switches of an identical design are mounted opposite each other, the distance d must be maintained between them. If two sensors of identical design are arranged in parallel, the distance e must be maintained between the sensors. To avoid mutual interference (cf. function), proximity switches of K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 compact ranges can be synchronized or operated in multiplex mode.
NSD0_00749
cm > 3 > 15 > 30 > 40 > 70
Distance d between two Sonar proximity switches mounted opposite each other with the same sensing range
d
Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000 d
NSD0_00747a
Fouling
The range of the proximity switch is reduced if the transducer surface is damaged or painted or if water or wet dirt is applied to it.
Sound cone Sonar proximity switch
cm > 120 > 400 > 1200 > 2500 > 4000
Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object perpendicular to the axis of the sound cone
Sound cone
NSD0_00745a
Sonar proximity switches with sensing range cm 6 (5) 30 20 to 130 (100) 40 to 300 60 to 600 80 to 1000
cm > 15 > 60 > 150 > 250 > 350
Object
Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object with unfavorable orientation
The distance e must be experimentally determined depending on the angle between the object and the Sonar proximity switch.
Object
Sound cone
NSD00746a
2/12
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Function
The Sonar proximity switches only operate through the medium of air and can detect any objects that reflect ultrasound. The sensors emit ultrasonic pulses cyclically. When an object reflects these pulses, the generated echo is received and converted into an electrical signal. The incoming echo is detected in accordance with its intensity which, in turn, is dependent on the distance between the object and the Sonar proximity switch. The Sonar proximity switches operate according to the echo propagation principle, i.e. the time difference between the emitted pulse and the echo pulse is evaluated. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons.
7
Active measurement system: The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal from the emitter to the receiver is measured. The enabling inputs of the two proximity switches must be connected together for this purpose. All options of the proximity switches can still be used; the range is twice the normal range.
Emitter and receiver This is the normal operating mode of the Sonar proximity switch; it operates as a typical proximity switch. 7 Diffuse sensor: In this case, the object that is to be detected acts as a reflector. As soon as an object enters the preset operating range, the echo from this object causes the output signal of the proximity switch to change.
Operating range
Resolution
The resolution is the smallest change in the distance to the object that is necessary for a change in the output of the BERO. The internal resolution is 256 or 4096 steps. If values are entered during programming that exceed this resolution, the program will automatically correct them. The corrected values will be displayed in a window with a message. Example 3RG6014..... sonar proximity switch (60 to 600 cm) For a sensing range 60 to 600 cm, this results in a resolution of 1.3 mm: 6000 mm 600 mm = 5400 mm 5400 mm/4096 = 1.3 mm (12 bit) If the measuring range is restricted, the step size is reduced because the distance that is split up into 4096 steps has reduced. The smallest step size is, however, limited to 1 mm by the electronics. If the sensing range is restricted, the resolution is enhanced.
7
Object not detected, switching output not active
Operating range
NSD0_01202
Object detected, switching output active
Reflex sensor: In this case, a permanently fixed reflector (e.g. a small metal plate) is mounted opposite the proximity switch. The operating range is adjusted to this reflector. If the path between the proximity switch and the reflector is interrupted, the sensor no longer detects the reflector and this triggers a change in the signal at the switching output.
Set operating range
Temperature compensation
The Sonar proximity switches of M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 compact ranges are fitted with temperature sensors and a compensation circuit that equalizes changes in operating distances caused by temperature changes. Compensation can be performed throughout the temperature range. This means that an absolute precision of 1.5 % (M30 K2 and M30 K3 compact ranges) or of 2.5 % (M18 compact range) is achieved.
Reflector detected, switching output active
Set operating range
Reflector hidden by object, switching output not active

NSD0_01203a
Operating modes with switching output

The Sonar proximity switches with switching output can be used in the following modes depending on their type. Only emitter, only receiver Two Sonar proximity switches are required in each case for this operating mode. One is parameterized as a receiver and the other is parameterized as the emitter. There are two possible applications: 7 Thru-beam sensor: It is only evaluated whether an object lies between the proximity switches. The range is twice the normal range. Adjustment of the operating range and evaluation of the analog output is not relevant in this case.
NSD0_01204a
Emitter
Object
Receiver
Object detected, switching output not active
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/13
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Synchronization
In K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 compact ranges, several devices can be synchronized with each other by simply interconnecting the synchronization outputs of the devices (Pin 2 for NO function, Pin 4 for NC function). Up to 10 devices can be synchronized (or 6 devices in the case of K0 compact range). This allows the sensors to be mounted extremely close to each other in many cases without causing mutual interference. Connection of the enable input: Sonar proximity switch active, Enable input XI at L+ or open. Sonar proximity switch inactive, enable input XI at 0 3 V DC Advantages Reliable protection against mutual interference. An object can be assigned to a proximity switch. Disadvantages Additional connection overheads (e.g. a PLC). Longer response time than for a synchronization circuit because each proximity switch is only active briefly and then has to wait until all the other proximity switches in the circuit have emitted. Example: Recognition of narrow objects Narrow objects are to be recognized and it shall be determined whether one, two or no objects are present.
B2 E1
Advantages No additional wiring overheads, simply connect the enable inputs of the individual proximity switches. Fast response, because every proximity switch is constantly active. Disadvantages The object cannot be assigned to a particular proximity switch. Example Two Sonar proximity switches are mounted at a clearance e that is smaller than the minimum clearance (see mounting guidelines). An object is located in their common sound field. The echo from B2 can reach B1 by reflection (GB). Mutual interference can occur. The object is detected from the two echoes E1 and E2 by Sonar proximity switches B1 and B2. If the two devices are synchronized, there may be no mutual interference, because for example, echo E1 arrives after echo E2 at proximity switch B2. The devices only ever respond to the first echo.
GB
NSD0_01195a
B1
E2 B2
E2
GB
E1
NSD0_01194a
B1
In this example, echo GB would cause proximity switch B1 to mistakenly detect an object. Synchronization of the proximity switches would not help here because echo pulse E2 would not arrive until after echo GB at proximity switch B1 and a proximity switch only ever detects the first echo. In this example, a PLC must be used to switch cyclically to and fro between the two proximity switches. Internal multiplex mode The Sonar proximity switches of K0, M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 compact ranges can be interconnected to form a network. Up to 10 devices (or 6 devices in the case of K0 compact range) can be operated in series or parallel (see "Synchronization"). No additional electronics is required. The enable inputs of all the proximity switches are simply connected together. On programming, each device is informed about the number of proximity switches in the network as well as its own position (address) in the network. When they have been wired up and the supply voltage has been connected, the proximity switches automatically operate in multiplex mode.
Multiplex function
External multiplex mode The fourth connection can be used as an external enabling input. This can be used to switch the Sonar proximity switch to active or inactive using an external control without the need to switch the supply voltage on and off. An external multiplex mode can be configured when Sonar proximity switches have to be switched on and off in sequence via the enabling input. In this case, it is ensured that the Sonar proximity switches will not interfere with each other. In contrast to internal multiplex mode, more than 10 Sonar proximity switches can be operated in multiplex mode.
2/14
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
SONPROG programming device
Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device and the relevant software, the Sonar proximity switches of M30 K2, M30 K3 and M18 compact ranges can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements. The device is an interface for the following tasks: Checking the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch Modifying the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch Aligning the Sonar proximity switch to the application.
SONPROG
This enables a Sonar proximity switch to be optimized specifically for an application. The adjustments found can be saved or printed out to facilitate maintenance and documentation of the equipment. When a Sonar proximity switch has been replaced, the new device can be programmed with the saved data quickly and easily. No new adjustments are necessary. The main parameters that can be set are Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Diffuse or reflex sensor. For a detailed description of the possible settings, see "SONPROG PC interface", page 2/260.
Adjustment with potentiometers

The potentiometers are used to select the required limits (min. or max.) of the switching range.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/15
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
SIMATIC design PXS100
30 cm 100 cm 150 cm 2/18 2/18 2/22 2/34 2/34 2/34 2/36 2/36 2/27 2/27 2/27 2/44 2/44 2/40 2/46 2/46 2/40 2/40 2/50 2/50 2/50 2/50 2/52 2/56 2/56 2/58 2/58 2/58 2/63 2/58 2/40 2/46 2/31 2/27 2/31 2/31 2/20
K21 K08 M18S M18 M18 M30 M30 M30 M30 K3 K0 ATEX K1 K2 K3 ATEX
K65 Sonar Spherical thru-beam sensor
3SG16
Double sheet control
PXS200
25 cm 30 cm 40 cm 70 cm 80 cm 130 cm 300 cm 600 cm
PXS300
30 cm 50 cm 100 cm 130 cm 150 cm 250 cm 300 cm 600 cm
PXS400
30 cm 130 cm 300 cm 600 cm 1000 cm
PXS800
30 cm 100 cm 130 cm 300 cm 600 cm
PXS900
6 cm
2/16
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
I Overview
SIMATIC sensors PXS100

K0 compact range, 3SG16 compact form, Sonar thru-beam sensor
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS100
Sensing range (cm) Operating mode

Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor
K0 compact range Fixed sensor head Separate sensor head 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100
Sonar thru-beam sensor 5 ... 150
3SG16 compact form 20 ... 100
Output
1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 10 V
Adjustment
1 potentiometer Jumper plug
Connection
M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminals
Degree of protection
IP65 IP67

2/20
2/18
See page
2/22
A configurator for fast product selection and ordering in the Internet can be found at www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/17
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
K0 compact range
I Overview I Design
The devices of K0 compact range are supplied in the standard version with permanently installed sensors. The devices of K0 compact range can also be supplied with separate sensors. Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces.
The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In 3RG63 42 devices, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in 3RG63 43 devices it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 25 mm in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of 1.6 m in length is molded onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the enclosure of K0 compact range is established via the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The plugin socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure.
I Function
K0 compact range is designed for simple applications. The devices are only suitable for operation as diffuse sensors. The sensors can be supplied with analog outputs. The end of operating range or analog range can be set using a potentiometer. Up to 6 devices can be synchronized with each other.
K0 compact range with separate and fixed sensor
The Sonar proximity switches of K0 compact range are ready-touse units with a rectangular enclosure. They are available with two sensing ranges. Operate as diffuse sensors Adjustable via potentiometer Can be synchronized Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching output - analog output Connection via M12 connector, type F
I Technical specifications
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C cm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms
3RG63 42
6 ... 30 11 5 0.45
3RG63 43
20 ... 100 22 10 1.5
10 ... 35 (including 10% residual ripple, at 10 18 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 30%) 100 max. 35 400 8 70 7 Yellow LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor 200 5 90 7
0 ... +55 40 ... +85
2/18
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
K0 compact range
Fixed sensor
cm
6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100
Sensing range

100 100 100 100 100 100
Switching output Analog output pnp

1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V } } } }
Order No.
Separate sensor
6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 6 ... 30 20 ... 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V } } }
3RG63 423AB00 3RG63 433AB00 3RG63 423AA00 3RG63 433AA00 3RG63 423JK00 3RG63 433JK00 3RG63 423AB01 3RG63 433AB01 3RG63 423AA01 3RG63 433AA01 3RG63 423JK01 3RG63 433JK01
I Dimensions
3RG 63 4.3..00
65 53
Pot. + LED
3RG 63 4.3..01
30
Ultrasonic converter
NSD00772
65 53
LED+Poti 30
88 76
76 88
5,3 13,5
24
5,3
13,5
B A
25
M 12
M 12
NSD00773
Type 3RG63 423..01 3RG63 433..01
A M18 M30
B SW 24 SW 36
I Schematics
NSD00759
NSD00760

1 2 3 4 L+ Output LXI
L+ XI LOutput
2 3 4
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
NO or analog output
NC
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/19
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
3SG16 compact form
I Overview I Function
Range definition and adjustability
The sonar proximity switch outputs a signal while an object is located in the set operating range or inhibit range outside the blind zone (see figure).
The sensing range between 0.2 and 1 m is subdivided into 8 equal operating ranges of 0.1 m. Each operating range B1 to B8 can be selected using a connector in the terminal compartment. The Sonar proximity switch signals with one output and one LED in each case whether objects are located in the set operating range or in the so-called inhibit range that precedes it. With the help of the supplied programming plug, two to eight of the separate operating ranges (B1 to B8) can be combined to form an extended operating range. The switching range is defined by two programming plugs. The plug is fitted to a pin connector in the terminal compartment of the device. The possible pin assignments are shown in the cover of the terminal compartment.
Sensing range (selectable operating ranges via jumpers in terminal compartment)
Sound cone approx. 5
3SG16 compact form
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
The sonar proximity switch in compact form for DC is a complete, factory-assembled unit, ready for connection. It cannot be combined with devices from the compact range. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Foreground and background suppression Adjustable by means of plug-in jumpers Solid-state outputs: - 2 switching outputs Terminal compartment with screw terminals
Set operating range e. g. 0.8 to 0.9 m Output 1 (green LED)
0
Blind zone
0,2
Blocking range: Output 2 (red LED)
0,8
0,9
1m
Modes
Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor The sonar proximity switch switches when an object enters the sound cone from any direction, output 14 (NO) outputs a 1-signal if the object is located within a set operating range (B1 to B8). Output 24 (SX) outputs a 1-signal if the object is in the inhibit range. Objects in the blind zone do not cause a utilizable signal change on outputs 14 and 24. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the ultrasonic beam will be interrupted by all objects in the inhibit range even those that absorb sound. In this case, output 14 (NO) changes to the 0-signal. In the case of reflective objects in the inhibit range, output 24 (SX) changes to the 1-signal at the same time.
I Design
All components are located in a single box-shaped enclosure. The ultrasonic converter and the terminal compartment are arranged on the same enclosure level. The electrical connections are made via screw terminals in the terminal compartment; cable entry is through an M20 cable gland.
Aligning unit
To make it easier to align the Sonar proximity switch with the object to be detected, a 3SX6 287 aligning unit is available. This unit allows swiveling about a horizontal and a vertical axis with an angle of rotation in each case of up to 30.
2/20
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00754
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
3SG16 compact form
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop Residual current Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C 25 ... 70 40 ... 85 mA V mA Hz ms ms 150 2 0.01 4 120 280 Yellow LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 cm cm
3SG16 compact form

20 ... 100 22
mm 10 mm 2 V mA 10 ... 35 (including 10% residual ripple, at 10 18 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 30%) < 60
kHz 200

3SG16 sonar proximity switches cm
Sensing range
20 ... 100
Rated operational Switching output Connection current mA pnp

150 2 NO Terminal compartment }
Order No.
3SG16 671BJ87 3SX6 287
Accessories
Aligning unit } Preferred type, available from stock.
I Dimensions
80 65 40 33
A NSD00777
5,3
135
65
7,3x5,3 LED
19,5 Sensor connector can be retrofitted
I Schematics
NSD00755
2 3 4
L+ Output 1 LOutput 2
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/21
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
Sonar thru-beam sensor
I Overview
The receiver located opposite evaluates this ultrasonic signal. Interruption of the tone by an object will cause the output signal to change.
Adjustment of sensitivity
The sensitivity can be adjusted at the receiver module at terminal 2 (NO version) or 4 (NC version).
XI
Switching rate
Hz 100 150 200
2
Not connected L L+ Sonar thru-beam sensor
Emitter/receiver distance
cm < 150 < 80 < 40
The sonar thru-beam sensor comprises an ultrasonic emitter and a receiver. The emitter and receiver circuits are installed in separate box-shaped enclosures of molded plastic. Operation as thru-beam sensor 3 measurement ranges can be set Solid-state output: - Switching output Connection - With 3 m cable - With M8 connector, 4-pole, type B - With M12 connector, 4-pole, type F
Object detection
The minimum size of detectable objects depends on the distance between emitter and receiver. If the distance is less than 40 cm, objects 2 cm or larger will be detected. The gap with between two objects must be at least 3 mm. If the distance is shorter, gaps of even <1 mm can be detected. At maximum distance, objects greater than 4 cm in size can be detected. In this case the gaps between the objects must be >1 cm.
Emitter Object Receiver
I Function
Thru-beam sensor mode

The emitter of the sonar thru-beam sensor emits a narrowly focused continuous tone in the direction of the receiver.
NSD00750
5 - 150 cm
Layout
Type
Sensing range Standard target Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Up to 40 cm Up to 80 cm Up to 150 cm Response time Up to 40 cm Up to 80 cm Up to 150 cm Power-up delay tv Status indication Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C ms ms ms ms Hz Hz Hz cm cm V mA mA
3RG62 43.P (receiver)

22 20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 100 < 20
3RG62 43.N (emitter)

5 ... 150
kHz 200 150 100 2 1.5 1 < 40 Green LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 0 ... +70 25 ... +85
200
2/22
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS100
Sonar thru-beam sensor
cm
5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 5 ... 150 } Preferred type, available from stock.
Sensing range

100 100 100 100 100 100
Switching output Connection pnp

1 NO 1 NC Emitter 1 NO 1 NC Emitter 1 NO 1 NC Emitter Cable, 3 m Cable, 3 m Cable, 3 m M 8 connector M 8 connector M 8 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector } } } }
Order No.
3RG62 430PB00 3RG62 430PA00 3RG62 430NN00 3RG62 437PB00 3RG62 437PA00 3RG62 437NN00 3RG62 433PB00 3RG62 433PA00 3RG62 433NN00
I Dimensions
3RG62 430..00
For M 4 40 31 4,5
3RG62 433..00, 3RG62 437..00

For M 4 40 31 4,5
28
28
31 40
29
NSD00771
I Schematics
NSD00751
4,5
4,5
19
28
NSD00774
29
19
28
31 40
NSD00753a
4/2
WH/BK 2/4
LL+
X1 L-

2 3 1 4
NSD01042a
3 2/4 1
3 BU BK/WH 4/2 1 BN
L+
Emitter
Receiver (NO/NC)
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/23
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
I Overview


M30 K1 compact range, M18S compact range, K21 compact range, K08 compact form
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS200

Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor
6 ... 30
Separate sensor head 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130
Fixed sensor head
M30 K1 compact range Swivel-mounted sensor head
Output
1 switching output

2/27
Adjustment
2 potentiometers
Connection
M12 connector
IP65
See page
2/24
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
2
SIMATIC PXS200
K08 compact range Sensing range (cm) Operating mode

5 ... 40
0 ... 80
0 ... 40
M18S compact range Straight sensor head Angled sensor head 2 ... 25 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2 ... 25 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70

2/36

2/31
Output
1 switching output 2 switching outputs Frequency output
Adjustment
Teach-in
Connection
M12 connector IP67
Degree of protection See page
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/25
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
SIMATIC PXS200
2
M18S compact range, 2 switching outputs Straight sensor head Angled sensor head 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 K21 compact range 2 ... 25 2.5 ... 40 0 ... 80


2/34
Output
1 switching output 2 switching outputs Frequency output
Adjustment
Teach-in
Connection
M8 connector M12 connector Cable
IP67
See page
2/31
2/26
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
I Overview I Design
Standard version
In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor.
Version with separate sensor
M30 design with fixed sensor
The Sonar proximity switches of M30 K1 compact range are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers Electronic switching output Connection via M12 connector, 3-pole or 4-pole, Type E, F
M30 design with separate sensor
Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. For 3RG6. 12 devices, the sensor is in an M18 sleeve, for 3RG6. 13 devices, the sensor is installed in an M30 sleeve with a length of 25 mm in each case. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead, which is 1.6 m long, is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established via the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The plug-in socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure.
Version with swivel sensor

These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of M30 K1 compact range. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard type cannot be used due to space limitations.
M30 design with swivel sensor
The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 100 to the cylinder axis.
Passive reflector
With the Sonar proximity switches of M30 K1 compact range, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is therefore reduced by about 6 cm.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/27
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
I Function
Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state.
Modes
Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector, even those that absorb sound.
The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
Sonar proximity switch Sound cone Object
Blind zone
Sensing range
Sound cone
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C mA mA mA Hz ms ms cm cm
3RG60 .2
6 ... 30 11
NSD0_00756
Initial value (adjustable)
Set operating or analog range (LED lit)
Final value (adjustable)
3RG60 .3
20 ... 130 22 10 2
3RG60 .4
60 ... 600 10 10 60 9
3RG60 .5
40 ... 300 55 20 5
mm 10 mm 0.45 V
12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%) 300 300 max. 50 200 4 110 280 80 1 400 280 120 2 200 280 8 80 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor 25 ... +70 40 ... +85 IP65
kHz 400
2/28
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
Fixed sensor
3RG60 123..00
Sensing range cm
6 ... 30

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Switching output pnp

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC
Analog output
Order No.
} } } } } } }
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 133..00
3RG60 123AD00 3RG60 133AD00 3RG60 153AD00 3RG60 143AD00 3RG60 123AC00 3RG60 133AC00 3RG60 153AC00 3RG60 143AC00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 153..00
3RG60 143..00
Swivel sensor
3RG60 253..00
6 ...
30
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 6 ... 30 30
Separate sensor
3RG60 123..01
3RG60 223AD00 3RG60 233AD00 3RG60 253AD00 3RG60 243AD00 3RG60 223AC00 3RG60 233AC00 3RG60 253AC00 3RG60 243AC00 3RG60 123AD01 3RG60 133AD01 3RG60 123AC01 3RG60 133AC01
20 ... 130 20 ... 130
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/29
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
33 19
With fixed sensor

3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00 3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34
3RG 6. 143..00
65 34 35 21
99
M 30x1,5 SW 36
M 30x1,5 SW 36
SW 36
27,3
NSD00778
27,3
NSD00779
150
27,3
10,5
NSD00780
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1
With swiveling sensor

3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28
12
3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100 47,5
3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 95 12 65
25
105 30
45
80
35
80
SW 36
80
131
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00783
131
M 30x1,5
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00785
27,3
NSD00784
27,3 10,5
131
27,3
10,5
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1
With separate sensor

3RG 6. 123..01
Cable length 1,6 m SW 24 25 M 18x1
3RG 6. 133..01
Cable length 1,6 m SW 36 25 M 30x1,5
SW 36 80
131 148
SW 36 80
M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5
27,3
NSD00786
27,3
NSD00787
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
I Schematics
NSD00757
NSD00758
10,5
131 148
L+

1 2 3 L+ Output L-
U
3 4 L-
U
Output
NC
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
NO
2/30
Siemens FS 10 2009
10,5
101 153
131
80
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact range
I Overview
M18S design
The Sonar proximity switches of the M18S compact series are ready-to-connect complete units in a cylindrical enclosure. Can be operated as diffuse sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via teach-in (switching output only) Electronic outputs: - Switching output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connected via M12 connector - 4-pole, type F (1 output) - 5-pole, type G (2 outputs)
I Design
M18S compact range can be supplied with an aligned sensor head or an angled sensor head. The small physical size of the sensors makes them ideal for applications where space is limited.
I Function
Available as diffuse sensors and reflex sensors. The sensors can be supplied with switching or frequency outputs. Due to their wide range and a minimized close range, they are suitable for a wide variety of applications.
Programming
The sensors with a switching output can be set via the device terminals by means of a teach-in function. For the sensors with a frequency output, the range can be set via the wiring. Evaluation can be performed in a PLC or in a LOGO! mini PLC.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/31
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact range
Type M18S Number of outputs
Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target cm cm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms
6GR62 22, 6GR62 32 1

2 ... 25 or 0 ... 25 3.5 ... 25 or 9 ... 25 22 10 or 2 1 (frequency output 2.5)
6GR62 21, 6GR62 31 1

2.5 ... 40 or 0 ... 40 4 ... 40 or 11.5 ... 40
6GR62 23, 6GR62 32 1

5 ... 70 or 0 ... 70 7.5 ... 70 or 20 ... 75 10 or 3
Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage (DC) Rated operating current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f ON-delay Power-up delay Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Storage
20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 150 Max. 20 400 10 50 20 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 300 200 5 100
C C
25 ... +70 40 ... +85
Type M18S Number of outputs

Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage (DC) Rated operating current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f ON-delay Power-up delay Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Storage C C cm cm cm mm mm V mA mA kHz Hz ms ms
6GR62 21, 6GR62 31 2

2.5 ... 40 4 ... 40 22 10 1 (frequency output 2.5) 20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple) 375 max. 20 300 10 50 20 2 yellow LEDs
3RG62 23, 6GR62 33 2

5 ... 70 7.5 ... 70
200 5 100
Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 25 ... +70 40 ... +85
2/32
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
M18S compact range
Straight sensor
cm
2 ... 25 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 0 ... 25 0 ... 40 0 ... 70 2 ... 25 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2.5 ... 40 5 ... 70 2.5 40 5 ... 70 2 25 2.5 40 5 70 0 25 0 40 0 70 2 25 2.5 40 5 70 2.5 40 5 70 2.5 40 5 70
Sensing range
Rated opera- Switching output Operating mode/ tional current frequency output mA pnp
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 375 375 375 375 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 375 375 375 375 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NC, 1 NO 1 NC, 1 NO Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 280 2000 Hz 140 1000 Hz 160 1600 Hz 40 400 Hz 150 1400 Hz 75 700 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor Reflex sensor 280 2000 Hz 140 1000 Hz 160 1600 Hz 40 400 Hz 150 1400 Hz 75 700 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor } } } } } } } } } } } }
Order No.
6GR62 323AB00 6GR62 313AB00 6GR62 333AB00 6GR62 323BB00 6GR62 313BB00 6GR62 333BB00 6GR62 323RS00 6GR62 313RS00 6GR62 333RS00 6GR62 31-3AH00 6GR62 33-3AH00 6GR62 31-3AJ00 6GR62 33-3AJ00 6GR62 223AB00 6GR62 213AB00 6GR62 233AB00 6GR62 223BB00 6GR62 213BB00 6GR62 233BB00 6GR62 223RS00 6GR62 213RS00 6GR62 233RS00 6GR62 21-3AH00 6GR62 23-3AH00 6GR62 21-3AJ00 6GR62 23-3AJ00 3RX4 010 3RX4 020
Angled sensor
Accessories
Teach-in adapter, 4-pole Teach-in adapter, 5-pole } Preferred type, available from stock.
I Dimensions
3RG62 2. (angled sensor)
Sensing surface
18,5
I Schematics
3RG62 3. (straight sensor)
0,5
M 18x1
NSD01290
NSD0_00820
M 18x1 12
NSD01291
L+ ET L Ausgang
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
2 3 4
51,5 37
51 A 37
SW 24
SW 24
Frequenzausgang 1 switching output/frequency output

FS10_00275
LED M 12x1
12
1 2 3 4 5
12
L+ ET L-
2 3
NSD00763a
1 5 4
LED M 12x1
NC
Switching output Switching output
2 switching outputs
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/33
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
K21 compact range
I Overview
Sonar proximity switches from the K21 compact range are complete, prewired units in a miniature cubic enclosure. Operation as a diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via "teach-in" (with switching output only) Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Wiring via M8 connector - 4-pole, type B
K21 compact range
I Benefits
Simple, precise object recognition Also senses transparent objects and liquids Ultrasonic: Not influenced by the objects color or brightness Suitable for use in cramped conditions and tough environments High degree of protection IP67 Configured using "teach-in"
Type
Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operating voltage, including 10% residual ripple Rated operating current Ie Switching output, max. Frequency output, max. No-load current I0, max. Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status indicator Enclosure material Transformer surface finish Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C mA mA mA kHz Hz ms ms cm cm cm mm mm
6GR62 42
2 ... 25 or 0 ... 25 4.5 ... 25 or 9.8 ... 25 2x2 2.5 1 (frequency output 2.5)
6GR62 41
2.5 ... 40 or 0 ... 40 4 ... 40 or 12 ... 40 4
6GR62 41-.P.. (receiver) 6GR62 41-.N.. (emitter)

0 ... 80
V DC 20 ... 30
200 100 20 400 10 50 150 Yellow LED ABS / PMMA Epoxy resin IP67 -25 ... +70 -40 ... +85 Yellow LED, green LED 300 5 75 100 5
2/34
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
K21 compact range
K21 compact range
Sensing range cm
2.5 40
Operating mode/ frequency output

Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor
Switching output
NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact
Connection
2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable 2 m cable } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A } A
Order No.
M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector } M8 connector }
4 40 2 25
40 ... 400 Hz / 80 ... 800 Hz 40 ... 400 Hz / 80 ... 800 Hz Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor
3.5 25 0 40
70 ... 500 Hz / 35 ... 250 Hz 70 ... 500 Hz / 35 ... 250 Hz Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor
0 25
Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor Retroflective sensor
0 80
Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver Thru-beam sensor receiver NO contact NO contact NC contact NC contact
2 m cable 2 m cable
M8 connector } M8 connector } } }
Accessories
Teach-in adapter Mounting bracket } Preferred type, available from stock. A: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H
6GR62 41-0AB00 6GR62 41-7AB00 6GR62 41-0AA00 6GR62 41-7AA00 6GR62 41-0RS00 6GR62 41-7RS00 6GR62 42-0AB00 6GR62 42-7AB00 6GR62 42-0AA00 6GR62 42-7AA00 6GR62 42-0RS00 6GR62 42-7RS00 6GR62 41-0BB00 6GR62 41-7BB00 6GR62 41-0BA00 6GR62 41-7BA00 6GR62 42-0BB00 6GR62 42-7BB00 6GR62 42-0BA00 6GR62 42-7BA00 6GR62 41-0NN00 6GR62 41-7NN00 6GR62 41-0PB00 6GR62 41-7PB00 6GR62 41-0PA00 6GR62 41-7PA00 3RX4 030 3RX7 308-0AA00
I Dimensions
12
NSD0_01091
20 3
12
NSD0_01092
20 3 39,6 31 24
33 31 24
3,3
3,3
12
2,6
M 8x1
2,6
I Schematics
1 L+ ET L Ausgang
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 3 0 1
NSD0_00820

2 3 4
B N
4 3 1 2
(1 ) (4 ) (3 )
+ 7 b E T S w /fre q o u tp u t 0 V
2 1 3
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 3 0 0
W H (2 ) B K B U
Frequenzausgang
1 switching output/frequency output
M8 connector, type B, cable
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/35
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
K08 compact form
I Overview
The Sonar proximity switches of K08 compact form are ready-touse all-in-one units with a rectangular metal enclosure. 3 versions with different operating modes: - Diffuse sensors with background suppression - Reflex sensor - Thru-beam sensor: Diffuse sensor and reflex sensor: - Up to 6 devices can be synchronized - Adjustment per teach-in Solid-state outputs: - 1 pnp and 1 npn switching output - NO/NC adjustable Connection via M12 connector, 5-pole, rotatable by 90, Type G
K08 compact form
Type
Operating mode Sensing range Adjustment range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C
3RG64 513CC00
Diffuse sensor mm 50 ... 400 mm 60 ... 400 cm 22 mm 10 mm 1 V mA mA Hz ms ms 150 Max. 25
3RG64 513DC00
Reflex sensor 0 ... 400 160 ... 400 22 2 1
3RG64 513SB00
Thru-beam sensor 0 ... 800 0 ... 800 22
20 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple)
kHz 300 8 100 250 Yellow LED Green LED Metal IP67 25 ... +70 40 ... +85
300 8 100 250
300 250 100 250

Cubic form
cm
5 ... 40 0 ... 40 0 ... 80
Sensing range

150 150 150
Switching output pnp + npn

1 selectable NO/NC contact each 1 selectable NO/NC contact each 1 NO each
Operating mode
Order No.
Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor emitter Thru-beam sensor receiver
3RG64 51-3CC00 3RG64 51-3DC00 3RG64 51-3NN00 3RG64 51-3SB00
2/36
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS200
K08 compact form
I Dimensions
8 10
M12x1 15
M4 7G (2x) t=3,5 38
4,5
LED YE LED GN
4,6 (2x)
M4
4,5
Converter
13 32,5
M4 7G (2x) t=6
24
48
NSD0-00822
I Schematics
NSD0_00821
66
1 2 3 4 5
L+

2 3
NSD00763a
24
Switching output 2
L-
1 5 4
Switching output 1
XI
NO
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/37
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
I Overview

M30 K2 compact range, M18 compact range, K65 compact form
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS300

M30 K2 compact range M18 compact range Fixed sensor head Swivel-mounted sensor Separate head sensor head Fixed sensor head 6 ... 20 ... 40 ... 60 ... 6 ... 20 ... 40 ... 60 ... 6 ... 20 ... 5 ... 10 ... 15 ... 30 130 300 600 30 130 300 600 30 130 30 100 100
K65 compact form 6 ... 50 20 ... 25 ... 150 250
Output
1 switching output 2 switching outputs Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output
Direct communication with the controller

IQ-Sense IO-Link
Temperature compensation Adjustment

1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers Teach-in SONPROG programming device

2/40

2/46
Connection
M12 connector
IP65 IP67
See page
2/44
2/38
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
I Notes
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/39
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
I Overview I Design
Standard version
The Sonar proximity switches of M30 K2 compact range are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Operate as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - 1 or 2 switching outputs - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection with M12 connector - 4-pole (with 1 output), Type F - 5-pole (with 2 outputs), Type G

These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of M30 K2 compact range. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations.
Passive reflector
With the Sonar proximity switches of M30 K2 compact range, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.
2/40
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
I Function
Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
Modes
Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors. The Sonar-BERO only evaluates whether or not an object is located between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor.
NSD0_00756
Initial value (adjustable) Blind zone
Set operating or analog range (LED lit) Sensing range
Programming
SONPROG
For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K2 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device.
Sound cone
The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching rate Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Sensitivity Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C mA mA mA Hz ms ms cm cm
3RG60 .2
6 ... 30 11
3RG60 .3
20 ... 130 22 10 2
3RG60 .4
60 ... 600 10 10 60 9
3RG60 .5
40 ... 300 55 20 5
mm 10 mm 0.45 V
12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%) 300 300 max. 50 200 4 110 280 80 1 400 280 120 2 200 280 8 80 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP65; IP68 with separate sensor 25 ... +70 40 ... +85 IP65
kHz 400
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/41
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
Fixed sensor
3RG60 123..00
Sensing range cm
6 ... 30
Rated operational Switching output Frequency output current mA pnp

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 2 NC 2 NC 2 NC 2 NC } } } } } } } } } }
Order No.
2
3RG60 133..00
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30
3RG60 123AF00 3RG60 133AF00 3RG60 153AF00 3RG60 143AF00 3RG60 123AE00 3RG60 133AE00 3RG60 153AE00 3RG60 143AE00 3RG60 123AH00 3RG60 133AH00 3RG60 153AH00 3RG60 143AH00 3RG60 123AG00 3RG60 133AG00 3RG60 153AG00 3RG60 143AG00 3RG60 123RS00 3RG60 133RS00 3RG60 153RS00 3RG60 143RS00 3RG60 223AF00 3RG60 233AF00 3RG60 253AF00 3RG60 243AF00 3RG60 223AE00 3RG60 233AE00 3RG60 253AE00 3RG60 243AE00 3RG60 123AF01 3RG60 133AF01 3RG60 123AE01 3RG60 133AE01
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 153..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG60 143..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600
6 ...
30
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC
30 ... 150 Hz 20 ... 130 Hz 20 ... 150 Hz 15 ... 150 Hz
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30
Swivel sensor
3RG60 253..00
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 6 ... 30 30
Separate sensor
3RG60 123..01
20 ... 130 20 ... 130
Accessories
SONPROG programming device,

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
3RX4 000
2/42
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
33 19
With fixed sensor

3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00 3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34
3RG 6. 143..00
65 34 35 21
99
M 30x1,5 SW 36
M 30x1,5 SW 36
SW 36
131
27,3
NSD00778
NSD00779
27,3
150
27,3
10,5
NSD00780
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1
With swivel sensor

3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28 105 30
12
3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100 47,5
3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 95 12 65
35
45
80 SW 36
80
80
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00783
131
M 30x1,5
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00785
131
NSD00784
27,3 10,5
131
27,3
27,3
10,5
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1

3RG 6. 123..01
3RG 6. 133..01
Cable length 1,6 m SW 36 25 M 30x1,5
SW 36 80
131 148
SW 36 80
M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5
27,3
NSD00786
27,3
NSD00787
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
I Schematics
NSD00759
NSD00760
10,5
131 148
L+ XI LOutput
2 3 4
2 3 4
L+ Output LXI
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
NO or analog output
M30 K2 compact range with 2 switching outputs
NSD0_00761
NC
1 2 3 4 5
L+ XI L-
NSD00762
1 2 3 4 5
L+
Switching output 1
2 3
NSD00763a
1 5 4
LXI
Switching output 2
Switching output 1 Switching output 2
NO
NC
10,5
101 153
80
25
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/43
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
M18 compact range
The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchronized with each other via the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode.
2
M18 design
For a detailed description, see M30 K2 compact ranges.
Programming
SONPROG
For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M18 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device.
The Sonar proximity switches of M18 compact range are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor, thru-beam sensor and can be parameterized as a reflex sensor with SONPROG Adjustable via a potentiometer, with SONPROG programming device Background suppression and can be set as foreground suppression with SONPROG Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Analog output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection via M12, 4-pole, Type F connector
The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.
I Design
The devices of M18 compact range are all supplied with permanently installed sensors in the longitudinal axis.
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C cm cm
3RG62 32
5 ... 30 11
3RG62 33
15 ... 100 22 2
mm 10 mm 1 V mA mA Hz ms ms 150 max. 60 200 4 120 280 5 100 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface IP67 25 ... +70 40 ... +85 12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple; at 12 20 V DC sensitivity reduced by up to 20%)
kHz 400
2/44
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
M18 compact range
Sensing range Rated operational current cm mA
5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 10 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 150 150 150 150
Switching output Analog/ frequency output pnp

1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz } } } } } } } } }
Order No.
Communication-capable proximity switches of the M18 IO-Link compact range1) Communication-capable proximity switches of the M18 IQ-Sense range
From IQ-Sense From IQ-Sense IQ-Sense IQ-Sense of IO-Link IO-Link
3RG62 323AB00 3RG62 333AB00 3RG62 323AA00 3RG62 333AA00 3RG62 323LS00 3RG62 333LS00 3RG62 323TS00 3RG62 333TS00 3RG62 323JS00 3RG62 333JS00 3RG62 323RS00 3RG62 333RS00 6GR63 33-3KS00 3SF62 323JA00 3SF62 333JA00 3RX4 000
Accessories

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
1) for further information, refer to "IO-Link" see page 2/6. Preferred type, available from stock.
I Dimensions
3RG 62 3.3A.00
M 18x1
4
3RG 62 3.3.S00
M 18x1 4 104 (-3) 65
NSD00775
104 (-3) 65
SW 24 72,5 90,5
Poti
NSD0 00776
LED (4x)
LED (4x)
I Schematics
NSD00759
NSD00760
SW 24 90,5

1 2 3 4 L+ Output LXI
2 3
NSD01042a
L+ XI LOutput
2 3 4
1 4
NO or analog output
NC
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/45
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form
Sensors with switching or analog output
Within the sensing range, the fill level of a container is detected. If the fill level reaches one of the two switching thresholds (Smin, Smax), the corresponding output is set. On emptying or filling, the switching outputs remain set in accordance with the hysteresis (Hmin, Hmax). This is signaled by the corresponding LED. If the level is located between the two operating ranges, both outputs are reset (see "Definition of the ranges").
Sonar-BERO
S max S min
Blind zone S max Sensing range S min

NSD0_01120
H max
S max S min
K65 compact form
The Sonar proximity switches of the K65 compact form are ready-to-use complete self-contained units. They operate with a DC supply. Their enclosure design and function makes them ideal for level applications in small containers. The devices feature two switching outputs (Smin and Smax) to which different distances can be assigned. This allows, for example, the minimum and maximum fill level in a tank to be evaluated. The values are set using the SONPROG programming device or by means of automatic alignment (teach-in function).
H min
S max S min
Definition of the ranges
I Design
All components are located in a box-shaped enclosure with rounded edges. The ultrasonic converter is mounted in the enclosure slightly recessed in the enclosure. The integrated circular sealing ring allows the Sonar proximity switch to be used as a plug with integrated level measuring. The tank opening must have a minimum diameter of 26 mm. It can be fixed to the tank by means of two M5 screws. The electric connection is made using a 5-pole connector with M12 thread.
Blind zone
Objects at close range cause fault signals, so the user must install the sensor such that the fill level cannot enter close range.
Programming
SONPROG
For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of K65 compact form can be programmed using a PC and the 3RX4000 SONPROG programming device.
2/46
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form
Type
Sensing range Standard target Switching threshold Smax Smin Hysteresis H Hmax (adjustable) Hmin (adjustable) Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop Switching element function Smax Switching element function Smin Ultrasonic frequency Response time Power-up delay tV LEDs Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C 25 ... 70 40 ... 85 2 yellow LEDs Green LED CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 ms ms mA V 150 or 300 (see Selection and Ordering data) 2 NO contact NO/NC programmable kHz 400 20 250 200 25 120 50 cm cm V mA 2 10 max. 60 5 10 10 20 cm cm 8 45 25 140 35 230 cm cm
3RG62 52
6 ... 50 11
3RG62 53
20 ... 150 22
3RG62 55
25 ... 250 55
12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%)

cm
Sensing range
6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250 6 ... 30 20 ... 150 25 ... 250
Rated opera- Switching Analog / tional current output frequency output mA pnp
150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 30 ... 150 Hz 20 ... 150 Hz
Connection
Order No.
M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector M12 connector
12.5 ... 125 Hz M12 connector } }
Accessories
3RG62 523AH00 3RG62 533AH00 3RG62 553AH00 3RG62 523BF00 3RG62 533BF00 3RG62 553BF00 3RG62 523CF00 3RG62 533CF00 3RG62 553CF00 3RG62 523GF00 3RG62 533GF00 3RG62 553GF00 3RG62 523RS00 3RG62 533RS00 3RG62 553RS00 3RX4 000 3RX4 010

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
Teach-in adapter
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/47
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS300
K65 compact form
I Dimensions
8,8 10 17 30 30
NSD01138
5,5
54
125
I Schematics
Wiring
NSD01119a
Sensors with switching output

Automatic alignment
1 2 1 3 4 4 5 L+ XI LS min S max
1 2 5 3
NSD001134
12
46 64,4
1 2 3 4 5 4
2 5 3
View from rear onto device XI must be connected to Lfor the automatic alignment.
2/48
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
I Overview

I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS400
Fixed sensor head Sensing range (cm) Operating mode

M30 K3 compact range Swivel-mounted sensor head 80 ... 1000 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600
6 ... 30
20 ... 130
40 ... 300
60 ... 600
Separate sensor head 6 ... 20 ... 30 130
Output
1 switching output Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V

2/50
Temperature compensation Adjustment

2 potentiometers SONPROG programming device
Connection
M12 connector
IP65
See page
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/49
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
I Overview I Design
Standard version
The Sonar proximity switches of M30 K3 compact range are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Operate as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG programming device Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching outputs - Analog output Connection via M12, 5-pole, Type G connector

These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of M30 K3 compact range. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations.
Passive reflector
With the Sonar proximity switches of M30 K3 compact range, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.
2/50
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
I Function
Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
between the Sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors. It is only sensed whether an object is located between the emitter and receiver. The range of the system is doubled as compared to the range of an individual sensor.
Programming
SONPROG
For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K3 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device.
Blind zone
Sensing range
Sound cone
Modes
Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie
NSD0_00756
The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching rate Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling mean value generation End of close range End of sensing range Multiplex function Temperature compensation Sensitivity Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO contact NC contact No-load current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response delay Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material mA mA mA Hz ms ms cm cm
3RG61 .2
6 ... 30 11
3RG61 .3
20 ... 130 22 10 2
3RG61 .5
40 ... 300 55 20 5
3RG61 .4
60 ... 600 10 10 60 9
3RG61 76
80 ... 1000 10 10 80 15
mm 10 mm 0.45 V
12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 ... 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%) 300 150 or 300 (see table below) max. 50 200 4 110 280 120 2 200 280 80 1 400 280 8 80 280 Yellow LED Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 300 150 max. 75 60 0.5 800 280
kHz 400
Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C
IP65; IP68 with separate sensor 25 ... +70 40 ... +85
IP65
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/51
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
Fixed sensor
3RG61 123..00
Sensing range cm
6 ... 30

300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 2 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V } } } } } } } }
Order No.
2
3RG61 133..00
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000
3RG61 153..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000

3RG61 143..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000

3RG61 766..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000 } Preferred type, available from stock.
3RG61 123BF00 3RG61 133BF00 3RG61 153BF00 3RG61 143BF00 3RG61 766BH00 3RG61 123BE00 3RG61 133BE00 3RG61 153BE00 3RG61 143BE00 3RG61 766BG00 3RG61 123CF00 3RG61 133CF00 3RG61 153CF00 3RG61 143CF00 3RG61 766CH00 3RG61 123CE00 3RG61 133CE00 3RG61 153CE00 3RG61 143CE00 3RG61 766CG00 3RG61 123GF00 3RG61 133GF00 3RG61 153GF00 3RG61 143GF00 3RG61 766GH00 3RG61 123GE00 3RG61 133GE00 3RG61 153GE00 3RG61 143GE00 3RG61 766GG00
2/52
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
Sensing range cm
6 ... 30
Swivel sensor
3RG61 253..00

300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 150 150 300 300 150 150 300 300 150 150

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V } }
Order No.
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 6 ... 30 30 30 30 30 30
Separate sensor
3RG61 123..01
3RG61 223BF00 3RG61 233BF00 3RG61 253BF00 3RG61 243BF00 3RG61 223BE00 3RG61 233BE00 3RG61 253BE00 3RG61 243BE00 3RG61 223CF00 3RG61 233CF00 3RG61 253CF00 3RG61 243CF00 3RG61 223CE00 3RG61 233CE00 3RG61 253CE00 3RG61 243CE00 3RG61 223GF00 3RG61 233GF00 3RG61 253GF00 3RG61 243GF00 3RG61 223GE00 3RG61 233GE00 3RG61 253GE00 3RG61 243GE00 3RG61 123BF01 3RG61 133BF01 3RG61 123BE01 3RG61 133BE01 3RG61 123CF01 3RG61 133CF01 3RG61 123CE01 3RG61 133CE01 3RG61 123GF01 3RG61 133GF01 3RG61 123GE01 3RG61 133GE01 3RX4 000
20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130 20 ... 130
Accessories

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/53
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS400
I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
33 19
With fixed sensor

3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00 3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34
3RG 6. 143..00
65 34 35 21
99
M 30x1,5 SW 36
SW 36
131
27,3
NSD00778
NSD00779
27,3
150
27,3
10,5
NSD00780
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1
With swivel sensor

3RG 6. 223..00 3RG 6. 233..00
18 12 28 105 30
12
3RG 6. 253..00
18 34 100 47,5
3RG 6. 243..00
18 37 95 12 65
25
35
45
80 SW 36
80
80
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00783
131
M 30x1,5
SW 36 M 30x1,5
NSD00785
131
NSD00784
27,3 10,5
131
27,3
27,3
10,5
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1

3RG 6. 123..01
Spherical
3RG 6. 133..01
M 30x1,5 Cable length 1,6 m SW 36 25
138
3RG 61 766..00
NSD00781
10,5
101 153
M 30x1,5 SW 36
80
160 8,5
112
26 10
160 90 69
SW 36 80
131 148
SW 36 80
M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5
27,3
NSD00786
27,3
NSD00787
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
I Schematics
NSD00764
1 2 3 4 5
L+ XI L-
NSD00765
10,5
131 148
1 2 3 4 5
L+
2 3
NSD00763a
1 5 4
Switching output
LXI
Switching output Analog output
Analog output
NO
NC
2/54
Siemens FS 10 2009
10
102
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
I Overview

M18 ATEX compact range, M30 K3 ATEX compact range
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS800

M18 ATEX compact range 5 ... 30 15 ... 100
6 ... 30
M30 K3 ATEX compact range 20 ... 130 40 ... 300
60 ... 600
Output

2/56
1 switching output Analog output 0 ... 20 mA Analog output 4 ... 20 mA Analog output 0 ... 10 V Frequency output Temperature compensation
Adjustment
1 potentiometer 2 potentiometers SONPROG programming device
Connection
IP65 IP67
M12 connector
Degree of protection Approval for hazardous area

Zone 2/22
See page
2/58
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
M18 ATEX compact range
I Overview I Design
The devices of M18 compact range are all supplied with permanently installed sensors in the longitudinal axis.
I Function
2
M18 ATEX design
The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchronized with each other via the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode. For a detailed description, see M30 K2 compact ranges. The sonar proximity switches of M18 ATEX compact range are ready-to-use, all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Sensors for Ex Zone 2/22 These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII. The approval is for: - gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and - dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X Operates as diffuse sensor, thru-beam sensor and can be parameterized as a reflex sensor with SONPROG Adjustable via a potentiometer using SONPROG programming device Background suppression and can be set as foreground suppression with SONPROG Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching output - analog output - frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection via M12, 4-pole, type F connector
Programming
SONPROG
For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M18 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device.
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie No-load supply current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material cm cm
3RG62 32-0XB.
5 ... 30 11
3RG62 33-0XB.
15 ... 100 22 2
mm 10 mm 1 V mA mA Hz ms ms 150 max. 60 200 4 120 280 5 100 280 Yellow LED -0XB4: Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface -0XB7: Stainless steel, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil IP67 C C 25 ... +70 40 ... +85 12 ... 30 V (including 10% residual ripple; at 12 20 V DC sensitivity reduced by up to 20%)
kHz 400
2/56
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
M18 ATEX compact range
cm Sensing range Rated operational current mA Switching output pnp
1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC
Analog/ frequency output
Order No.
Brass, nickel-plated, epoxy resin converter surface

5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 5 ... 30 15 ... 100 150
4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 250 ... 1500 Hz 150 ... 1000 Hz }
Stainless steel, epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil

150 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC
3RG62 323AB00-0XB4 3RG62 333AB00-0XB4 3RG62 323AA00-0XB4 3RG62 333AA00-0XB4 3RG62 323LS00-0XB4 3RG62 333LS00-0XB4 3RG62 323TS00-0XB4 3RG62 333TS00-0XB4 3RG62 323JS00-0XB4 3RG62 333JS00-0XB4 3RG62 323RS00-0XB4 3RG62 333RS00-0XB4 3RG62 323AB00-0XB7 3RG62 333AB00-0XB7 3RG62 323AA00-0XB7 3RG62 333AA00-0XB7 3RG62 323LS00-0XB7 3RG62 333LS00-0XB7 3RG62 323TS00-0XB7 3RG62 333TS00-0XB7 3RG62 323JS00-0XB7 3RG62 333JS00-0XB7 3RG62 323RS00-0XB7 3RG62 333RS00-0XB7 3RX4 000
Accessories

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
I Dimensions
3RG 62 3.3A.00
M 18x1
4
I Schematics
3RG 62 3.3.S00
M 18x1 4
NSD00759

1 L+ XI LOutput
2 3
NSD01042a
1 4
2 3 4
104 (-3) 65
104 (-3) 65
SW 24 72,5 90,5
SW 24 90,5
NO or analog output
NSD00760
Poti
NSD0 00776
1
NSD00775
LED (4x)
LED (4x)
2 3 4
L+ Output LXI
NC
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/57
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
M30 K3 compact range ATEX
I Overview
2
Sound cone
Blind zone
Sensing range
Operating modes
Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor
M30 K3 ATEX design with fixed sensor
An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the sonar proximity switch and the reflector, even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensor It is only sensed whether an object is located between the emitter and receiver. The range of the system is doubled compared to the range of a single sensor.
The M30 K3 ATEX compact range sonar proximity switches are ready-to-use, all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capabilities. Sensors for Ex Zone 2/22 These sonar proximity switches are approved according to EU Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII. The approval is for: - gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X and - dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C X Operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable via 2 potentiometers using SONPROG programming device Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - switching outputs - analog output Connection via M12, 5-pole, type G connector
Programming
For optimum adaptation to the operating conditions, all sensors of the M30 K3 compact range can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device.
SONPROG
I Design
Passive reflector
With the sonar proximity switches of M30 K3 ATEX compact range, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.
The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling mean value generation End of blind zone End of sensing range Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 10 units.
I Function

Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false signals. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the set operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.
2/58
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00756
Final value (ad justable)
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
Type
Sensing range Standard target Hysteresis H Repeat accuracy R Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie NO NC No-load current I0 Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Time delay before availability tv Switching status display Enclosure material mA mA mA kHz Hz ms ms 300 150 or 300 (see table below) max. 50 400 8 80 280 Yellow LED -XB4 Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface -0XB7 Stainless steel, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil IP65 C C 25 ... +70 40 ... +85 200 4 110 280 120 2 200 280 80 1 400 280 cm cm mm mm V
3RG61 .2-0XB.
6 ... 30 11 10 0.45
3RG61 .3-0XB.
20 ... 130 22 10 2
3RG61 .5-0XB.
40 ... 300 55 20 5
3RG61 .4-0XB.
60 ... 600 10 10 60 9
12 ... 30 (including 10% residual ripple, at 12 20 V sensitivity reduced by approx. 20%)
Brass, nickel-plated, epoxy resin converter surface

3RG61 123..00

6 ... 30 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V
Order No.
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600

3RG61 133..00
6 ...
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ...

3RG61 153..00
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600
3RG61 143..00
3RG61 123BF00-0XB4 3RG61 133BF00-0XB4 3RG61 153BF00-0XB4 3RG61 143BF00-0XB4 3RG61 123BE00-0XB4 3RG61 133BE00-0XB4 3RG61 153BE00-0XB4 3RG61 143BE00-0XB4 3RG61 123CF00-0XB4 3RG61 133CF00-0XB4 3RG61 153CF00-0XB4 3RG61 143CF00-0XB4 3RG61 123CE00-0XB4 3RG61 133CE00-0XB4 3RG61 153CE00-0XB4 3RG61 143CE00-0XB4 3RG61 123GF00-0XB4 3RG61 133GF00-0XB4 3RG61 153GF00-0XB4 3RG61 143GF00-0XB4 3RG61 123GE00-0XB4 3RG61 133GE00-0XB4 3RG61 153GE00-0XB4 3RG61 143GE00-0XB4
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/59
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
Stainless steel, epoxy resin converter surface with protective foil
3RG61 123..00

6 ... 30 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150
Order No.
1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC
4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V } }
20 ... 130
2
3RG61 133..00
40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ...
3RG61 153..00
30
20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600
3RG61 143..00
Accessories
3RG61 123BF00-0XB7 3RG61 133BF00-0XB7 3RG61 153BF00-0XB7 3RG61 143BF00-0XB7 3RG61 123BE00-0XB7 3RG61 133BE00-0XB7 3RG61 153BE00-0XB7 3RG61 143BE00-0XB7 3RG61 123CF00-0XB7 3RG61 133CF00-0XB7 3RG61 153CF00-0XB7 3RG61 143CF00-0XB7 3RG61 123CE00-0XB7 3RG61 133CE00-0XB7 3RG61 153CE00-0XB7 3RG61 143CE00-0XB7 3RG61 123GF00-0XB7 3RG61 133GF00-0XB7 3RG61 153GF00-0XB7 3RG61 143GF00-0XB7 3RG61 123GE00-0XB7 3RG61 133GE00-0XB7 3RG61 153GE00-0XB7 3RG61 143GE00-0XB7 3RX4 000

100 ... 240 V AC, 24 V DC
2/60
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS800
I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
33 19
With fixed sensor

3RG 6. 123..00 3RG 6. 133..00 3RG 6. 153..00
47,5 34
3RG 6. 143..00
65 34 35 21
99
M 30x1,5 SW 36
M 30x1,5 SW 36
SW 36
131
27,3
NSD00778
NSD00779
27,3
150
27,3
10,5
NSD00780
10,5
M 12x1
M 12x1
M 12x1
I Schematics
M30 K3 ATEX compact range
NSD00764
1 2 3 4 5
L+ XI L-
NSD00765
1 2 3 4 5
L+
2 3
NSD00763a
1 5 4
Switching output
LXI
Switching output Analog output
Analog output
NO
NC
10,5
101 153
80
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/61
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS900
I Overview

I Selection table
SIMATIC PXS900

Thru-beam sensor
Double sheet control 2 ... 6
Output

2/63
2 switching outputs
Adjustment
Teach-in
Connection
M12 connector IP65
Degree of protection See page
2/62
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS900
These devices are used mainly for monitoring sheets of paper as well as plastic and metal film. Each sheet is compared to the stored reference value and indicated as a single or double sheet accordingly. The 3RX2 210 signal evaluator continuously signals the situation between the Sonar sensors at the two outputs A1 and A2. Output A1 "Single sheet" remains active as long as only one sheet is located between the sensors. Output A2 "Double sheet" is activated as soon as two or more sheets are detected between the sensors. Two LEDs also indicate the status of the outputs. The yellow LED A1 indicates a single sheet and the red LED A2 indicates a double sheet.
Programming
The signal evaluator can be set to two different modes.
S E N D R E C
S E N D
R E C
S IE M E N S
3 R X 2 2 1 0
L E D S E T L E D
S E T
Double-layer sheet monitoring with separate sensors
S 2
0
S E T
0 1
S 1
A 1 A 2
The 3RX2 210 Sonar proximity switch for double-layer sheet monitoring comprises one signal evaluator and two Sonar sensors (emitter and receiver). Reliable detection of multiple layers of paper, plastic sheets or metal foil Measuring range from 20 g/m2 paper to 1100 g/m2 cardboard Manual or automatic offset Sonar sensors in M18 enclosure Short-circuit proof electronic outputs (pnp) Connection via M12 connector
A 1 A 2
L E D
U B : 2 0 ..3 0 V D C M A D E IN G E R M A N Y
O U T
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 2 9 a
User interface
Manual setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "1". The sensor is set up for the material to be sensed either by pressing the "SET" button on the top of the device or by applying a control command to the "SET" input of the M12 connector (pin 5). The value obtained remains stored until the setting procedure is repeated. The sensor is set by placing a single sheet between the Sonar sensors and activating the "SET" command. The 3RX2 210 requires max. 100 ms for the setting; i.e. the "SET" key must be pressed for this time, or a "1" signal (> 6 V) must be present at pin 5. The green LED "SET" flashes during the setting. It lights up permanently following successful setting. Automatic setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "0" (factory setting). Setting can be performed as described above or automatically when a sheet is fed in and the supply voltage is applied if a sheet lies between the sensors at this moment. Automatic setting is performed when a sheet is fed in following an interval of 2 s during which a sheet was not detected between the Sonar sensors.
I Design
The emitter and receiver sensors are of the same type and must be mounted at an angle of 30 (10) or 5 to the vertical. The setting is made using the internal S2 switch. If the system is operated at an inclination angle of 5 to 20, the S2 switch (operating mode) must be set to position "1". The object to be detected must be located approximately 5 to 15 mm above the emitter. A wider mounting angle increases the flutter range, e.g. at an angle of 40, fluttering within 60% of the measuring range is permitted. The spacing between the emitter and receiver must be at least 20 mm and can be up to 60 mm. Precise alignment is essential (1). The operating range is reduced if they are not aligned along the axis.
B = 5 ... 1 5 m m
A = 2 0 ... 6 0 m m
R E C
C S E N D
= 2 0 ... 4 0
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 3 0 a
Sensor mounting
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/63
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXS900
Type
Sensing range Material strength (paper, cardboard) Operational voltage (DC) No-load current I0 Switching output Rated operational current Ie Voltage drop at 200 mA Ultrasonic frequency Switching frequency f Response time Power-up delay tv Switching status display Enclosure material Evaluation unit Sensor Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage C C 0 ... +65 40 ... +85 Metall Brass, nickel-plated; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 mA V kHz Hz ms ms 200 <3 200 100 5 100 Red and yellow LEDs mm g/m2 V mA
3RX2 210
20 ... 60 20 ... 1100 18 ... 36 (including 10% residual ripple) < 75

Double-layer sheet monitoring cm
Sensing range
2 ... 6

200
Switching output Connection pnp

2 NO M12 connector
Order No.
3RX2 210
I Dimensions
Evaluation unit
84 64 16 4,3 37 13
Sensor
~2000 M8
2,5
25 M 18 x 1
24 M8
NSD01132
78 98
74
5 13
NSD01131
10
M 12 x 1
2/64
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Schematics
I Schematics
NO function
L+ L Synchronization cable
NSD0 01196
NSD0 01197
Synchronization
NC function
L+ XI L
L+ XI L
L+ NC L
L+ NC
3 4 NO
3 4 NO
3 4 XI
L 3 4 XI
External multiplex mode

NO function
L+ L
NSD0 01198
NC function
L+ L
L+ 1 XI 2 3 L 4 NO
1 2 XI 3 L
L+
PLC 50 mA
NSD0 01199
L+ 1 NC 2 3 L 4 XI
1 2 NC 3 L 4 XI
L+
4 NO
PLC 50 mA
PLC 50 mA PLC 50 mA
Internal multiplex mode (analog output)

NO function
NSD0 01200
NC function
L+ XI L NO I a / Ua
NSD0 01201
1 2 3 4 5
L+ XI L NO I a / Ua
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
L+ NC L XI I a / Ua
1 2 3 4 5
L+ NC L XI I a / Ua
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/65
Siemens AG 2008

Characteristic curves
I Characteristic curves
Sound cones
The following diagrams are the results of measurements with Sonar proximity switches, with their production-dependent scatter, at room conditions (20 C). Standard reflectors moved radially are detected within the possible sensing range by the Sonar proximity switches. The following pages show the sound cones for the following designs: K0, K08 compact ranges Sonar thru-beam sensor K65 compact range M18, M18S compact ranges K21 compact range M30 K1, M30 K2 and M30 K3 compact ranges
The diagrams apply to the individual types of sensor for the defined reflectors and for larger reflectors. Measurement 1 with an aligned object, with the most optimum reflection keep environment free of objects which should not be detected. Measurement 2 with an object which has partially aligned surfaces detection of round materials and plates with rounded edges. Measurement 3 with an object with a plane surface moving perpendicularly to the sound cone detection of plane surfaces and edges. Defined reflectors: Measurements 1, 3: plane object - 2 cm 2 cm, for sensors with sensing ranges up to 130 cm - 10 cm 10 cm, for sensors with larger sensing ranges Measurement 2: cylindrical object, 8 cm diameter.
2/66
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

K0 compact range, sensing range 6 ... 30 cm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0
12 9 Object
Sound cone width in cm
NSD 01207
Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0

12 9
NSD 01208
Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0

12
NSD 01209
Maximum Average Minimum

BERO
Maximum Object Minimum Average
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5
Maximum Minimum
6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5
Object
6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Object distance in cm
BERO
BERO
2
Average 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Object distance in cm
-12
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Object distance in cm
-12
-12

36
NSD 01210

36
NSD 01211

36
NSD 01212
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0
Average Maximum Minimum

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20
Average Maximum Object Minimum

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20
Average Maximum
Object
BERO
Object
Minimum
20
40
60
80
100 120
40
60
80
100 120
40
60
80
100 120
Object distance in cm
K65 compact form, sensing range 25 ... 250 cm

90
NSD 01261

90 Sound cone width in cm 60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60 120 180 240 300 Minimum Maximum Average
NSD 01262

90
NSD0 01263
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0
Maximum Average Object Minimum

BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60
Object
BERO
Object
Maximum Average
BERO
Minimum
60
120
180
240
300
120
180
240
300
Sonar thru-beam sensor, sensing ranges 5 ... 40 cm, 5 ... 80 cm, 5 ... 150 cm
Receiver angle 0
30 20 in cm in cm
Emitter Receiver
NSD 01264
Variable receiver angle, optimally aligned

30 20
Emitter Receiver
NSD 01265
10 0 -10 -20 -30 0 50 100 150 200 250
10 0 -10 -20 -30 0 50 100 150 200 250
Sound cone width
Sound cone width
Distance emitter to receiver in cm
Distance emitter to receiver in cm
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/67
Siemens AG 2008

M18 compact range, sensing range 5 ... 30 cm
12 9 Average Maximum
NSD 01266

12
NSD0 01267

12
NSD0 01268
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30 Minimum
Maximum Average Object

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30
Object
BERO
6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12
Object
Minimum
BERO
10
20
30
40 50 60
70
40 50 60
70
40 50 60
70

12
NSD0 01269

12
NSD0 01270

12
NSD0 01271
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12
Average Maximum Minimum Object

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Minimum Maximum Average

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20
Object
Object
BERO
10
20
30
40 50 60
70
30
40 50 60
70

12
NSD 01272

12
NSD0 01273

12
NSD0 01274
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0
Maximum Average Minimum Object

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 5
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 5
Maximum Average
Object
BERO
BERO
Minimum
Minimum
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
10 15 20 25 30 35 40
10 15 20 25 30 35 40

12
NSD0 01275

12
NSD0 01277
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Minimum Maximum Average

BERO
Object
BERO
Object
Insufficient sensitivity
2/68
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

M18 compact range, sensing range 15 ... 100 cm
36
NSD 01213

36
NSD 01214

36
NSD 01215
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0
Object
BERO

BERO
24 12 0
Maximum Average
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0
Object
BERO
Minimum
-12 -24 -36 0 40 80 120 160 200
2
40 80 120 160 200
40
80
120
160
200

36 Sound cone width in cm 24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 40 80 120 160 200 Minimum Maximum Average
NSD 01216

36
NSD 01217

36
NSD 01218
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 40 80
Maximum Average
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0
Object
Object
BERO
Object
BERO
Minimum
BERO
120
160
200
40
80
120
160
200

36
NSD 01219

36
NSD 01220

36
NSD 01221
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0
Object
Maximum Average
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20 40 60
Maximum Average
BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Minimum Maximum Average
Object
BERO
Minimum
BERO
Minimum
20 40 60
80 100 120 140
80 100 120 140

36
NSD 01222

36
NSD 01223

36
NSD 01224
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36
Object
BERO

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36
Object

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36
Object
Maximum Minimum
Average
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/69
Siemens AG 2008

M18S compact range, sensing range 2 ... 25 cm
5 4 Sound cone width in cm 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Object distance in cm 45
Object Sound cone width in cm
FS10_00313

2 1,5 1 0,5 0 -0,5 -1 -1,5 -2 0 5 10 15 20 Object distance in cm 25 Average
FS10_00314
Object
Average
BERO
BERO

5 4 Sound cone width in cm 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 Object distance in cm 60
BERO
FS10_00315

2,5 2 Sound cone width in cm 1,5 1 0,5 0 -0,5 -1 -1,5 -2 -2,5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Object distance in cm 45
FS10_00316
Average
Average
Object
Object
BERO

15 Sound cone width in cm 10 Average 5 0 -5 -10 -15 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Object distance in cm
BERO
FS10_00317

5 4 Sound cone width in cm 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Object distance in cm 80 Average Object
FS10_00318
Object
BERO

6 4
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 5

5 4
G _ F S 1 0 _ E N _ 0 0 0 1 6
S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m
S o u n d c o n e w id th in c m
O b je c t
B E R O
2 0 -2 -4 -6 0 1 0 2 0
M in im u m A v e ra g e M a x im u m
O b je c t
B E R O
3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 0
M in im u m A v e ra g e M a x im u m
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
1 0
1 5
2 0
2 5
3 0
3 5
4 0
4 5
O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m
O b je c t d is ta n c e in c m
2/70
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

K21 compact range, sensing range 20 ... 250 mm
Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection)
4
FS10_00271
Measurement 2 (plane object)

4
FS10_00272
3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 0 5
Average
Object
3 2 Average 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Object distance in cm
Object
BERO
BERO
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Object distance in cm
K21 compact range, sensing range 25 ... 400 mm

Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection)
4
FS10_00273
Measurement 2 (plane object)

4
FS10_00274
3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 0 5
3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Object distance in cm Average
Average
Object
Object
BERO
BERO
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Object distance in cm
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/71
Siemens AG 2008

M30 K1 to M30 K3 compact range, sensing range 6 ... 30 cm
12
NSD0 01278

12
NSD0 01279

12
NSD0 01280
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30 Minimum
Average Maximum Object
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0
Minimum
Average Maximum
Object
BERO
BERO
10
20
30
40 50 60
70
40 50 60
70
10
20
30
40 50 60
70

12
NSD0 01281

12
NSD0 01282

12
NSD0 01283
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30 Minimum
Average Maximum Object

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30
Average Maximum Minimum

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20 30 Minimum
Object
Object
Maximum Average
BERO
40 50 60
70
40 50 60
70
40 50 60
70

12
NSD0 01284

12 9
NSD 01285

12
NSD0 01286
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20

BERO
9 6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20
Object
6 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 0 10 20
Maximum Average
BERO
Maximum Average
Object
BERO
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum 30 40 50
30
40
50
30
40
50

12
NSD0 01287

12
NSD0 01289

BERO
Object
Object
BERO
Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to M30 K1 compact range.
2/72
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

42
NSD 01225

42
NSD 01226

42
NSD 01227
Maximum Average
Object
BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -42 Object

Minimum
BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -42
Maximum Average
Object
Minimum
BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -42
2
0 40 80 120 160 200
40
80
120
160
200
40
80
120
160
200

36
NSD 01228

36
NSD 01229

36
NSD 01230
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0

BERO
24 12 0
Object
BERO
Maximum Average
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 40 80
Object
BERO
Minimum
-12 -24 -36 0 40 80 120 160 200
40
80
120
160
200
120
160
200

36
NSD 01231

36
NSD 01232

36
NSD 01233
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20
Object
BERO
Average Maximum
BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36 0 20
Object
Average Maximum
Minimum
Minimum
40
60
80
100 120
40
60
80
100 120
40
60
80
100 120

36
NSD 01234

36
NSD 01236
24 12 0
Object
BERO

BERO
24 12 0 -12 -24 -36
Object
Maximum Minimum
-12 -24 -36 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Average
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/73
Siemens AG 2008

90
NSD 01237

90 Sound cone width in cm 60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60 120 180 240 300 Minimum
NSD 01238

90
NSD 01239
Maximum Object Average Minimum

BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60 120 180 240 300
Maximum Average
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60
Object
Object
BERO
BERO
120
180
240
300

90
NSD 01240

90
NSD 01241

90
NSD 01242
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0
Maximum
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60 120
Object
BERO
Object
Average Minimum
BERO

BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60
Object
60
120
180
240
300
180
240
300
120
180
240
300

90
NSD 01243

90
NSD 01244

90
NSD 01245
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0
Object
BERO
Maximum Average
Object
BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0
Maximum Average
BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60
Object
Maximum Average
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
60
120
180
240
300
60
120
180
240
300
120
180
240
300

90
NSD 01246

90
NSD 01247

90
NSD 01248
60 30 0
Object
BERO
Maximum Average
BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60 120
Object
Maximum Average
BERO
60 30 0 -30 -60 -90 0 60
Object
Maximum Average
-30 -60 -90 0 60
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
120
180
240
300
180
240
300
120
180
240
300
2/74
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

M30 K1 M30 K3 compact range, sensing range 60 ... 600 cm
120
NSD 01249

120
NSD 01250

120
NSD 01251
80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Object Maximum Average Minimum
BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Object Maximum Average Minimum
BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 0 Minimum
Maximum Average
Object
BERO
-120
-120
100 200 300 400 500 600

120
NSD 01252

120
NSD 01253

120
NSD 01254
80 40 0 -40 -80 0
Maximum Average
80 40 0

BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0
Object
BERO
Maximum Average
Object
Minimum
BERO
Minimum
-40 -80 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
-120
-120
100 200 300 400 500 600
100 200 300 400 500 600

120
NSD 01255

120
NSD 01256

120
NSD 01257
80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0

BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 0
Maximum Average
80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0
Object
BERO
Object
BERO
Minimum
100 200 300 400 500 600
-120
100 200 300 400 500 600
100 200 300 400 500 600

120
NSD 01258

120
NSD 01259

120
NSD 01260
80 40 0 -40 -80 0
Object
BERO

BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 -120 0
Object
Maximum Average
BERO
80 40 0 -40 -80 0
Object
Minimum
-120
100 200 300 400 500 600
100 200 300 400 500 600
-120
100 200 300 400 500 600
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/75
Siemens AG 2008

Glossary for sonar proximity switches
I More information
Active surface
Gas types The Sonar proximity switch is designed for operation in atmospheric air. If it is operated in other gases, different values for the speed of sound and attenuation can result in significant measurement errors and even malfunction (e.g. in carbon dioxide). Air currents Changes to the speed of sound as a result of constant changes in the flow direction and flow velocity of the air cannot be quantified by means of a generally applicable formula. High-temperature objects, such as glowing metal, cause air turbulence. This will scatter or deflect the ultrasound. An echo will not be generated that can be evaluated. Precipitation Average levels of precipitation in the form of rain or snow will not adversely affect the functionality of the sonar proximity switch. The transducer surface should not, however, be wetted. Dewing is permissible. Paint spray This has no determinable effect on the functioning of the sonar proximity switch. To prevent any detrimental effect on the sensitivity of the transducer, however, the paint spray must not be allowed to settle on the active transducer surface. External sound External sound is distinguished from the system-specific echoes and does not usually cause malfunctions. The active surface of an ultrasonic proximity switch is the surface at which the ultrasound is emitted and received (IEC).
Reference axis
The reference axis is the axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC).
Sensing range
The sensing range is defined as the range within which the operating distance can be set (IEC). With the sonar proximity switches, this range extends from 3 cm to 10 m depending on the type. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons.
Operating distance
The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Rated operating distance sn The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for the definition of the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). Effective operating distance sr The real operating distance is the operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC).
Repeat accuracy R
The repeat accuracy is the change in the effective operating distance sr at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 C ( 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The repeat accuracy of the Sonar proximity switch is 0.15% of full-scale.
Accuracy
The accuracy is the permissible error that exists as the difference between the true distance and the indicated value. The accuracy of a Sonar proximity switch depends on internal tolerances as well as certain physical parameters of the air such as humidity, atmospheric pressure and air movement. These parameters influence the sound propagation time and therefore the measured value received. Atmospheric pressure Any other atmospheric changes at a permanent site will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. Between sea level and 3000 m altitude, the speed of sound is reduced by less than 1%. Sound propagation is not possible in a vacuum. Air humidity At room temperature and at lower temperatures, the humidity will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. At higher temperatures, the speed of sound increases with humidity. Air temperature The sound propagation time is dependent on the air temperature. An air temperature of 20 C is used as the reference variable here. The speed of sound changes with air temperature by 0.17%/K. This temperature-dependent change in sound propagation time means that as the temperature increases, the distance to the object appears to become shorter. A change in temperature of, for example, +10 C results in a change in the speed of sound of approximately +1.75% and therefore a change in the operating distance of +1.75%.
2/76
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
I Notes
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/77
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Photoelectric proximity switches fast and accurate sensing with light and laser
PXO series
The photoelectric proximity switches are organized in different product families in accordance with their technical version and design:
SIMATIC sensors Version PXO100 Cylindrical version,

mini
Design
D4, M5, M12 M18, M18S, L18 K21, K21R, K20, L20, C20 K31, K30 C40, L50, L50HF, L50HF adv., C50 K80, L80HF, L90L GL, LV70
PXO200 PXO300 PXO400 PXO500 PXO600 PXO800
Cylindrical versions Cubic version, mini Cubic version, small Cubic version Cubic version, large Special device amplifiers
I Application
Pure photoelectric astuteness this is what distinguishes these extremely precise, quick-acting and accurately pin-pointing photoelectric proximity switches. This is supplemented by firstclass ease of adjustment using a teach-in function or potentiometer and easiest possible handling during operation. With the wide range of different designs, from cubic to cylindrical right down to miniature designs and different types, e.g. as diffuse sensors with or without background suppression, retroreflective or thru-beam sensors, they master any task with a range of up to 50 m superbly. The various versions of the photoelectric proximity switches are predominantly used in the following applications: In conveyor systems In packaging machines In mechanical engineering In paper, textile and plastics processing In printing machines For access control. These photoelectric sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic. Special versions of the K20 form in miniature enclosure and the C40 are available for detecting transparent objects. Special devices such as the color sensor or color mark reader can be used to detect differences in color or contrast. The analog laser supports extremely precise distance measurements and position monitoring.
Highlights
Extremely precise and quick-acting with pin-point locating ability Maximum performance even over large distances Small, compact enclosure Degree of protection up to IP68 Adjustable ranges Easy commissioning (teach-in) Suitable for global use (UL/CSA)

The K80 ATEX photoelectric proximity switch is approved according to EU Guideline 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII The approval is for: Gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6x and Dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C x The functionality of the photoelectric proximity switches with ATEX approval is identical to that of the standard proximity switches.
Configurator
A configurator for photoelectric proximity switches is available in the Mall. Based on the technical features required, the desired product can be quickly and easily selected, placed in the shopping cart and ordered. The configurator can be reached by the following link: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Safety-related applications
The use of the sensors is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the proximity switch.
NSD0_00801
2/78
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Design
The devices can be mounted in any position. They should be installed in such a manner as to prevent dirt deposits as far as possible. The available accessories enable the devices to be mounted easily and correctly.
Photoelectric proximity switches Dimension a

D4/M5 M12 M18 K31 K30 K80 L18 (laser light barrier) L50 (laser light scanner) L50 (laser light barrier) C50 (color sensor) 1) Focusing at 50 m. 50 mm 250 mm 250 mm 250 mm 750 mm 500 mm 150 mm 1) 30 mm 80 mm 500 mm
Alignment
Diffuse sensor The sensor must be aligned with the object to be sensed to ensure reliable switching. In devices that have a surplus light function, the relevant LED must be active. Reflex sensors Place the reflector at the required location and secure it firmly. Cover the reflector with adhesive tape so that only the center (approximately 25 % of the surface) remains free. Install the reflex sensor so that it switches reliably. Finally remove the adhesive tape from the reflector. Thru-beam sensors Place the receiver in the required position and secure it firmly. Align the emitter with the receiver as accurately as possible.
Setting the operating distance

Sensitivity is either adjusted using a built-in potentiometer or taught by means of a teach-in function. When a potentiometer is used, turning clockwise increases sensitivity and thus the achievable operating distance. Diffuse sensor and diffuse sensor with background suppression The object is positioned in front of the sensor inside its sensing range. Set the sensitivity, or distance, in such a way that the object to be scanned is sure to be sensed. If necessary, the surplus light display (green LED) must be active. The object must then be removed. If the output remains on, sensitivity must be reduced. In devices with teach-in function, sensitivity is adjusted automatically. During this process, the sensor is taught the two states "Object there" and "Object not there" by pressing the keys. Reflex sensors and thru-beam sensors In normal cases, the sensor is always operated with sensitivity at maximum. This produces the maximum surplus light. It is usually only necessary to reduce sensitivity for sensing very small or transparent objects. The procedure is the same as for diffuse sensors.
Minimum clearance
The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The following distances are recommended values only. The values given are for maximum sensitivity.
N S D 0 _ 0 0 7 9 5
Diffuse sensor
Cable length
Long cables between the devices result in: Additional capacitive loading (short-circuit protection) Increased injection of interference.
a
For this reason the specified maximum cable length must not be exceeded.
N S D 0 _ 0 0 7 9 6
Reflex sensor
N S D 0 _ 0 0 7 9 7
Thru-beam sensor.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/79
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Function
Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)

The light from the emitter falls on an object and is reflected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the output is switched.
Thru-beam sensors
Thru-beam sensors comprise an emitter and a receiver. The emitter is aligned in such a way that the greatest possible amount of pulsed light from the emitter diode reaches the receiver. The receiver evaluates the incoming light to clearly separate it from the ambient light and other light sources. Any interruption of the light beam between emitter and receiver causes the output to switch.
The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiometer. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors.
Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All objects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is suppressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver.
Devices for fiber-optic wires

Optical fibers are fitted in front of the emitter and receiver. They represent the "extended eye" of the photoelectric proximity switch. As optical fibers are very small and flexible, they provide a practical solution to the problem of sensing at points that are not easily accessible. Furthermore no electrical potential is transferred.
Reflex sensors
The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed via a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range. An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch.
Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

The analog laser proximity switch can measure the exact distance of an object within its sensing range. Due to the use of visible laser light, the measurement is highly accurate and the output is extremely linear. All laser proximity switches belong to safety class 2, i.e. they are harmless and can be used without any risk to health (e.g. to the eyes).
2/80
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Color sensors
The color sensor functions with an incandescent LED, which illuminates the object. During sensor adjustment, the light reflected from the object is measured and assigned to the appropriate output. The recognized color is stored in the device in a non-volatile memory, and is immediately available even when the sensor has been switched off and on again. Either three independent colors or one color scale can be saved and evaluated. The measured color value (RGB) is not available.
Color mark sensor

The color mark sensor uses green or red emitted light. The color is selected automatically depending on the contrast. The mark color and the background color can be set separately by means of two keys.
The table lists data which are independent of the design
Type
Voltage drop at 200 mA Operating capacity Reverse current of outputs Power-up delay Hysteresis (typical) for diffuse sensors Repeat accuracy for diffuse sensors Ambient light limit Sunlight Halogen light Precautions Overload protection Overvoltage protection Short-circuit protection Permissible cable length m Lux Lux V mA mA ms
Solid-state output
Max. 2.0 Max. 200 Max. 0.1 Max. 20 10% 5% of operating distance
Relay output (K80)

2000 Max 300 10%
Devices with laser

Max. 2.4 Max. 200 Max. 0.1 Max. 300 5%
10.000 3.000 Max. 250 Back-up fuse required Max. 250 Max. 100
For further technical specifications, see respective type
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/81
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Design Operating mode PXO100 D4
Diffuse sensor Thru-beam Diffuse sensor sensor
M5
Thru-beam Diffuse sensor sensor
M12
Reflex sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam Diffuse sensor sensor
M18S
Reflex sensor with polarization filter
M18
Thru-beam Diffuse sensor sensor with background suppression
L18
Thru-beam sensor
5 cm 25 cm 30 cm 150 cm 400 cm
2/86 2/86
2/87 2/87 2/88 2/88 2/88 2/93 2/91 2/91 2/91 2/91 2/91 2/94
PXO200
1 ... 12 cm 60 cm 80 cm 250 cm 300 cm 600 cm 5000 cm
Design Operating mode PXO300

2.5 ... 10 cm 3 ... 11 cm 4 ... 15 cm 50 cm 5 ... 50 cm 300 cm 7.5 ... 300 cm
K21/K21R
K20
Reflex sensor with Reflex sensor background suppression
L20
Reflex sensor with Reflex sensor background suppression
C20
Contrast sensor
2/99 2/100 2/101 2/97 2/99 2/97 2/100

3 ... 15 cm 60 cm 120 cm 200 cm 400 cm 600 cm 1200 cm Depending on fiber-optic wire
K31
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Thru-beam with polariza- sensor tion filter For plastic fiber-optic wires Diffuse sensor
K30
Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor For plastic fiber-optic wires
2/103 2/103 2/105 2/103 2/105 2/103 2/105 2/103 2/105
2/82
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Design Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
C40
Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor with polarization filter Reflex sensor for transparent objects Diffuse sensor with background suppression
L50
Laser Laser reflex diffuse sensor sensor with analog output
L50HF
L50HF advanced
C50
Laser Color diffuse sensor sensor with analog output
PXO500
1.2 ... 3.2 cm 4.5 ... 8.5 cm 3 ... 15 cm 3 ... 10 cm 5 ... 25 cm 8 ... 30 cm 70 cm 100 cm 600 cm 2000 cm 2/108 2/110 2/108 2/108 2/108 2/112 2/110 2/112 2/110 2/114

25 ... 75 cm 20 ... 100 cm 20 ... 600 cm 20 ... 3000 cm 200 cm 600 cm 1200 cm 5000 cm
K80
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor
L80HF
L90L
Laser diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with analog output
2/119 2/116 2/120 2/120 2/116 2/116 2/116 2/116

3 cm 5 cm 8 cm 12 cm Depending on fiber-optic wire
GL
Thru-beam sensor
LV70
For plastic fiber-optic wires
2/123 2/123 2/123 2/123 2/125
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/83
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Notes
2/84
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO100
I Overview
D4, M5, M12.
SIMATIC sensors PXO100
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO100
Operating mode
D4
M5
M12
Sensing range
1 m ... 1.5 m 4 m ... 6 m
5 cm ... 11 cm 20 cm ... 30 cm

2/88
Output
pnp npn

2/88
Operating voltage
24 V DC

2/86

2/86

2/87

2/87

2/88
Connection
Special features
Metal enclosure
Illuminant See page
Red light Infrared light
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/85
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO100
D4 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable)
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Thru-beam sensor
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Reliable detection Surplus light underrange Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
5 (not adjustable) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 10 100 250 2.5 880 (IR) Yellow LED Yellow LED flashing Stainless steel IP67
25 (not adjustable)
mm 100 100 (white)
5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) 250 2.5 880 (IR)
0 ... +55 3RG70 40...00 3RG70 42...00
%/K 0.3

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor 5
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
880 (IR)
Connection
Switching output Circuit diagram1) number

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Order No.
Thru-beam sensor
25
880 (IR)
2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.14 mm2 npn, light-ON M 8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, Type A npn, light-ON cable 2 m, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.14 mm2 npn, light-ON Emitter M 8 connector, 3-pole, Type A pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter
3RG70 400AB00 3RG70 400GB00 3RG70 407AB00 3RG70 407GB00 3RG70 420AB00 3RG70 420GB00 3RG70 420BG00 3RG70 427AB00 3RG70 427GB00 3RG70 427BG00
1) see page 2/127.
I Dimensions
3RG70 4.0..00
4
3RG70 4.7..00
4
26,5 35
26,5 28
NSD00802
LED
2/86
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00803
LED
45
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO100
M5 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable)
Operating mode
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Reliable detection Surplus light underrange Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C Yellow LED
Diffuse sensor
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm 5 (not adjustable) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 10 100 250 2.5 880 (IR) 250 2.5 880 (IR)
Thru-beam sensor
25 (not adjustable) 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver)
mm 100 100 (white)
Yellow LED flashing Brass, nickel-plated IP67 0 ... +55 3RG70 30...00 3RG70 32...00 %/K 0.3

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor 5
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
880 (IR)
Connection
2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 3-pole, type A

pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter pnp, light-ON npn, light-ON Emitter 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 } } }
Order No.
Thru-beam sensor
25
880 (IR)
2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.14 mm2 M 8 connector, 3-pole, type A
3RG70 300AB00 3RG70 300GB00 3RG70 307AB00 3RG70 307GB00 3RG70 320AB00 3RG70 320GB00 3RG70 320BG00 3RG70 327AB00 3RG70 327GB00 3RG70 327BG00
1) see page 2/127.
I Dimensions
3RG70 3.0..00
M 5x0,5 SW 7 26,5 30 35
3RG70 3.7..00
M 5x0,5 SW 7 26,5 30 LED
NSD00805
LED
NSD00804
45
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/87
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO100
M12 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable via potentiometer) Reflex sensor Sensing range 1.5 m Supplied without reflector
Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 4 m Enabling input for test purposes
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Thru-beam sensor
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
30 (adjustable)
150 Reflector type D84 15 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized)
400 15 / 15 (emitter / receiver) 1000 0.5 660 (red)
mm 200 200 (white) 15 200 1000 0.5 660 (red) Yellow LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP67 C 25 ... +55 3RG71 20...00 %/K 0.3
10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)
3RG71 21...00
3RG71 22...00
2/88
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO100
M12 design
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range cm
Illuminant Connection nm
2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2
Switching output
pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON
Circuit diagram1) number

12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 7 13 12 13 12 7 } } } } } } } } } } } } } }
Order No.
660 (red) 30 (adjustable via potentiometer)
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Reflex sensor 150 660 (red, polarized) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Thru-beam sensor 400 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter
1) see page 2/127. } Preferred type, available from stock.
3RG71 200AB00 3RG71 200AA00 3RG71 200GB00 3RG71 200GA00 3RG71 203AB00 3RG71 203AA00 3RG71 203GB00 3RG71 203GA00 3RG71 210AB00 3RG71 210AA00 3RG71 210GB00 3RG71 210GA00 3RG71 213AB00 3RG71 213AA00 3RG71 213GB00 3RG71 213GA00 3RG71 220AB00 3RG71 220AA00 3RG71 220GB00 3RG71 220GA00 3RG71 220BG00 3RG71 223AB00 3RG71 223AA00 3RG71 223GB00 3RG71 223GA00 3RG71 223BG00
I Dimensions
3RG71 200..00
M 12x1 4
3RG71 203..00
M 12x1 4
3RG71 210..00 and 3RG71 220..00

M 12x1
3RG71 213..00 and 3RG71 223..00

M 12x1
SW 17 31,5
SW 17 44
SW 17
60
50
Pot. LED
NSD0 00806
Pot. LED
60
LED
LED
NSD00808
NSD0 00807
NSD00809
SW 17 44
50
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/89
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
I Overview
M18S, M18, L18.
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO200
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor
M18S
M18
L18
Sensing range
12 cm ... 15 cm 60 cm ... 80 cm 1 m ... 1.5 m 2 m ... 3 m 4 m ... 6 m 20 m ... 50 m

2/91
Output
pnp npn

2/93

2/91

2/91
Operating voltage
24 V DC
Connection
M12 connector Cable
Special features
Surplus light emission Metal enclosure
Illuminant
Red light Laser light, red
See page
2/94
2/90
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
M18S design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 60 or 80 cm (adjustable using a potentiometer) Reflex sensors Sensing range 2.5 m (with angle head) or 3.0 m Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Scanning angle 6 m
2
Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor
Operating mode
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm
80 (adjustable)
60 (adjustable)
250 (for 3RG76 51) 300 (for 3RG76 41) Reflector type D84
600
mm 200 200 (white) V mA Hz ms nm 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 150 700 0.5 660 (red) Yellow LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP67 C 25 ... +55 3RG76 40...00 3RG76 50...00 %/K 0.3
660 (red, polarized)
660 (red)
3RG76 41...00, 3RG76 51...00
3RG76 42...00, 3RG76 52...00

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range cm
Switching output
Straight sensor
80 660 (red) (adjustable via potentiometer) 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 2 3 0.34 mm pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function

12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B
Order No.
3RG76 400AB00 3RG76 400AA00 3RG76 400CC00 3RG76 400CD00 3RG76 403AB00 3RG76 403AA00 3RG76 403CC00 3RG76 403CD00 3RG76 410AB00 3RG76 410AA00 3RG76 410CC00 3RG76 410CD00 3RG76 413AB00 3RG76 413AA00 3RG76 413CC00 3RG76 413CD00
Reflex sensor
300
1) see page 2/127. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/91
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
M18S design
Operating mode
Straight sensor
Thru-beam sensor
Sensing range cm
600
Illuminant nm
660 (red)
Connection
Switching output

12 12 5 6 9 12 13 5 6 9 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 12 13 5 6 12 12 5 6 9 12 13 5 6 9 } } } } } B } B } B B B B B B B } B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B B } B } B } B } B } B } B
Order No.
Angled sensor
Diffuse sensor 60 660 (red) (adjustable via potentiometer)
2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 2 0.34 mm2 Emitter M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function Emitter
3RG76 420AB00 3RG76 420AA00 3RG76 420CC00 3RG76 420CD00 3RG76 420BG00 3RG76 423AB00 3RG76 423AA00 3RG76 423CC00 3RG76 423CD00 3RG76 423BG00 3RG76 500AB00 3RG76 500AA00 3RG76 500CC00 3RG76 500CD00 3RG76 503AB00 3RG76 503AA00 3RG76 503CC00 3RG76 503CD00 3RG76 510AB00 3RG76 510AA00 3RG76 510CC00 3RG76 510CD00 3RG76 513AB00 3RG76 513AA00 3RG76 513CC00 3RG76 513CD00 3RG76 520AB00 3RG76 520AA00 3RG76 520CC00 3RG76 520CD00 3RG76 520BG00 3RG76 523AB00 3RG76 523AA00 3RG76 523CC00 3RG76 523CD00 3RG76 523BG00
Reflex sensor
250
2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 660 (red, 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 2 polarized) 3 0.34 mm pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.34 mm2 pnp, dark-ON 4 0.34 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function Emitter
Thru-beam sensor
600
660 (red)
2 0.34
mm2
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON pnp, light-ON and dark-ON pnp, light-ON and surplus light function Emitter
1) see page 2/127. } Preferred type, available from stock. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
Dimensions refer to M18.
2/92
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
M18 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 1 to 12 cm (adjustable via potentiometer)
Operating mode
2
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C Yellow LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP67 25 ... +55 3RG71 34...00 %/K 0.3 cm V mA mA Hz ms nm 1 ... 12 (adjustable) 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 25 200 500 1 660 (red) mm 50 50 (white)

Operating mode
Sensing range cm
Illumi- Connection nant nm

Switching output
pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON

12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 } } }
Order No.
Diffuse sensor 1 ... 12 660 with (adjustable via (red) background potentiometer) suppression
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON
3RG71 340AB00 3RG71 340AA00 3RG71 340GB00 3RG71 340GA00 3RG71 343AB00 3RG71 343AA00 3RG71 343GB00 3RG71 343GA00
I Dimensions
M18 type
M 18x1 4
M18S type
3RG71 3.3..00
M 18x1
3RG71 3.0..00
3RG76 4.-...00
M 18 1 16,6
NSD0_01299
3RG76 5.-...00
M 18 1 16,6
NSD0_01288
SW 24 29
4 SW 24 29
4 SW 24 min. 34
Pot. LED GN YE M 12 1 16,3 13 27,9
NSD0 00810
Pot. LED GN YE M 12 1 16,3 13 27,9
65 72,1
65
Pot. LED
Pot. LED 4x
4 SW 24 min. 34
50
63,5
NSD0 00811
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/93
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
L18 design
I Overview
Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode
m V mA mA Hz ms nm
Laser thru-beam sensor

50 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 15 (receiver), 10 (emitter) 200 6000 < 0,083 660 (red laser light) Yellow LED Red LED Green LED Brass, nickel-plated IP65 C 10 ... +60 3RG71 35...00, 3RG71 75...00 %/K 0.1
Sensing range Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type

Operating mode
Laser thru-beam sensor
Straight sensor
Sensing range Illuminant Connection m nm

50 660 (red, (adjustable via polarized) potentiometer) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2

pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 5 }
Order No.
3RG71 350CC00 3RG71 350BE00 3RG71 353CC00 3RG71 353BE00 3RG71 350CD00 3RG71 353CD00
9 5
} }
Straight sensor
Laser thru-beam sensor 50 660 (red, (adjustable via polarized) potentiometer)
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 pnp, light-ON and surplus light function
9 6
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F and surplus light function
Angled sensor
Laser thru-beam sensor 50 660 (red, (adjustable via polarized) potentiometer) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 pnp, light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 5 9 5 }
3RG71 750CC00 3RG71 750BE00 3RG71 753CC00 3RG71 753BE00
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON 4-pole, type F and dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter
2/94
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO200
L18 design
Operating mode Sensing range Illuminant Connection m nm
50 660 (red, (adjustable via polarized) potentiometer) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.25 mm2 M12 connector, 4-pole, type F
Angled sensor
LaserThru-beam sensor

pnp, light-ON and surplus light function pnp, light-ON and surplus light function 6
Order No.
3RG71 750CD00 3RG71 753CD00
1) see page 2/127.
I Dimensions
Straight sensor
3RG71 350C.00
M 18x1 5
3RG71 350BE00
M 18x1
3RG71 353C.00
M 18x1 4
3RG71 353BE00
M 18x1 5
37
48
SW 24
48
37
SW 24
SW 24
Pot. Pot. LED

NSD0 00853 NSD00854
LED
NSD0 00858 NSD00859
M 12x1
M 12x1
Angled sensor
3RG71 750C.00
27,7 SW 24 20 SW 24
3RG71 750BE00
28,7 5
3RG71 753C.00
27,7 SW 24 20 SW 24
SW 24
64
75
75
64
3RG71 753BE00
28,7 5
M 18x1 SW 24
M 18x1
75
75
M 18x1
75
75
75
75
M 18x1
M 18x1
NSD00857
NSD00855
NSD0 00856
NSD00860
M 12x1
M 12x1
NSD0 00861
M 12x1
NSD00862
Pot. LED
Pot. LED
M 18x1
SW 24
48
48
48
48
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/95
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
I Overview
K21, K21R, K20, L20, C20.
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO300
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Contrast sensor
K21
K21R
K20
L20
C20
Sensing range
5 cm ... 11 cm 12 cm ... 15 cm 40 cm ... 50 cm 2 m ... 3 m
Output
pnp npn
Operating voltage
24 V DC
Connection
M8 connector Cable
Special features
Transparent objects
Illuminant
Red light Laser light, red
2/97
2/97
2/98
2/98
2/99
2/99
See page
2/100
2/100
2/101
2/96
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
K21, K21R designs
I Overview
Cubicle molded plastic enclosure, IP68 Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 50 cm Retroflective sensor Sensing range 3 m Supplied without mounting accessories and without reflector
Operating mode
2
Reflex sensor
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
50 10 ... 30 28 150 700 0.5 660 (red) Yellow LED Red LED ABS/PMMA IP68 33
300 Reflector type R 60 25 30
mm 100 100 (white 90%)
5 ... +55 3RG74 00...00 3RG74 20...00 3RG74 01...00 3RG74 21...00
%/K 0.3

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
K21 design
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
Connection Switching output

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B B B B } B B B B B B B B } B } B B B
Order No.
50
660 (red) 2 m cable, pnp, light-ON PUR, 2 pnp, dark-ON 3 0.14 mm npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, type A pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON
Retroreflective 300 sensor
3RG74 000AB00 3RG74 000AA00 3RG74 000GB00 3RG74 000GA00 3RG74 007AB00 3RG74 007AA00 3RG74 007GB00 3RG74 007GA00 3RG74 010AB00 3RG74 010AA00 3RG74 010GB00 3RG74 010GA00 3RG74 017AB00 3RG74 017AA00 3RG74 017GB00 3RG74 017GA00
1) see page 2/127. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99. } Preferred type, available from stock.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/97
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
K21, K21R designs
Operating mode Sensing range cm Illuminant nm Connection Switching output Circuit diagram1) number
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 } B B B B B } B B B B B B B B } B B B
Order No.
K21R design
Diffuse sensor 50
pnp, light-ON 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 2 pnp,dark-ON 3 0.14 mm npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, type A pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON
2
Reflex sensor 300
Accessories
Mounting brackets for K21, K21R
1) see page 2/127. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99. } Preferred type, available from stock.
3RG74 200AB00 3RG74 200AA00 3RG74 200GB00 3RG74 200GA00 3RG74 207AB00 3RG74 207AA00 3RG74 207GB00 3RG74 207GA00 3RG74 210AB00 3RG74 210AA00 3RG74 210GB00 3RG74 210GA00 3RG74 217AB00 3RG74 217AA00 3RG74 217GB00 3RG74 217GA00 3RX7 3080AA00
I Dimensions
3RG74 0.0.... 3RG74 0.7....
12
NSD0_01091
20 3
12
NSD0_01092
20 3 39,6 31 24
33 31 24
3,3
3,3
12
2,6
M 8x1
2,6
3RG74 2.0....
3RG74 2.7....
29,9 12
NSD0_01093
29,9 12
NSD0_01094
20 3
20 3
M 18x1
39,5 31 24
3,3
3,3
46 44
11
2,6
2,6
M 8x1
12 M 18x1
2/98
Siemens FS 10 2009
M 18x1
24
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
K20 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 2.5 to 10 cm (adjustable using teach-in) Retro-reflective sensors for transparent objects (adjustable with teach-in) Sensing range 50 cm Anti-interference function Supplied without mounting material and without reflector
Operating mode
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0 (typ.) Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C Yellow LED Green LED

cm V mA mA Hz ms nm 2.5 ... 10 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 25 100 1000 0.5 660 (red) mm 100 100 (gray 18%)
Reflex sensor for transparent objects

5 ... 50 (adjustable) Reflector type R 60
Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 20 ... +60 3RG74 04...00 3RG74 01...52 %/K 0.3

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor for transparent objects
Sensing range cm
2.5 ... 10 (adjustable via "teach-in") 5 ... 50 (adjustable via "teach-in")
Illumi- Connection nant nm

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 4-pole, type B 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 4-pole, type B
Switching output
Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON

pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 pnp 14 npn 14 } } } } }
Order No.
Accessories
Mounting brackets for K20
1) see page 2/127.
3RG74 040CH00 3RG74 040HH00 3RG74 047CH00 3RG74 047HH00 3RG74 010CH52 3RG74 010HH52 3RG74 017CH52 3RG74 017HH52 3RX7 3080AA00
I Dimensions
3RG74 0.0....
12 3.2
NSD00826
3RG74 0.7....
12 3.2
NSD00827
4.2
24
32
24 4
4.2
2.6 10.7 20
M 8x1
2.6 10.7 20
3.8
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/99
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
L20 design
I Overview
Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 1 or 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 11 cm
Retroflective sensor Sensing range 7.5 to 300 cm
Operating mode
cm
Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression

3 ... 11 (adjustable)
Reflex sensor
7.5 ... 300 (adjustable) Reflector type RL 50 1 mm at 300 mm distance 25 4 650 (red laser light, class 1)
Sensing range Standard target/reflector Light spot diameter Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Type
mm Gray 18% mm 0.7 mm at 100 mm distance V mA mA nm 10 ... 30 30 100 650 (red laser light, class 2) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C 20 ... +60 3RG74 067CH61
kHz 1
3RG74 077CH00

Operating mode
Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroflective sensor
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
Connection Switching output

M8 connector, 4-pole, type B M8 connector, 4-pole, type B Light-ON or dark-ON

pnp 14 }
Order No.
3 ... 11 650 (adjustable (laser via "teach-in") red)
3RG74 067CH61 3RG74 077CH00
7,5 ... 300 650 (adjustable (laser via "teach-in") red)
Light-ON or dark-ON
pnp 14
Accessories
Mounting brackets for L20
3RX7 308-0AA00
I Dimensions
3RG74 0.7CH..
12 3.2
NSD00827
32
24 4
4.2
M 8x1
2.6 10.7 20
2/100
Siemens FS 10 2009
3.8
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO300
C20 design
I Overview
Visible laser light (red) Laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Contrast sensor for color mark sensing Sensing range 4 to 15 cm
Operating mode
Contrast sensor
Sensing range Light spot diameter Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Output current IA Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching state output Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Type
cm V mA mA Hz nm
4 ... 15 (adjustable via teach-in) 10 ... 30 25 100 4000 650 (red) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67
mm 0.7 in focus
20 ... +60 3RG74 087CH00

Operating mode
Contrast sensor
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
Connection
M8 connector, 4-pole, type B

pnp 14 }
Order No.
650 4 ... 15 (red) (adjustable via "teach-in")
3RG74 087CH00
Accessories
Mounting brackets for C20
3RX7 308-0AA00
I Dimensions
3RG74 087CH00
12 3.2
NSD00827
32
24 4
4.2
M 8x1
2.6 10.7 20
3.8
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/101
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO400
I Overview
K31, K30.
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO400
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor For plastic fiber-optic wires
K31
K30

2/105
Sensing range
Depending on fiber-optic wire 12 cm ... 15 cm 60 cm ... 70 cm 1 m ... 1.5 m 2 m ... 3 m 4 m ... 6 m 12 m ... 15 m
Output
pnp npn
Operating voltage
24 V DC

2/103
Connection
M8 connector Cable
Illuminant
Red light Infrared light
See page
2/102
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO400
K31 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 60 cm (adjustable via potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 15 cm (adjustable via potentiometer) Reflex sensor Sensing range 2 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Sensor for plastic fiber-optic wires Sensing range depends on type of optical fiber Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
60 (adjustable)
3 ... 15 (adjustable) 100 100 (white) 25 500 1 660 (red)
200 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 15 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized)
mm 200 200 (white) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP65 C 25 ... +55 3RG70 10... %/K 0.3
10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple)
3RG70 14...
3RG70 11...
Operating mode
Thru-beam sensor
Sensor for plastic optical fibers
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Displays Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
600 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple) 15 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) IP65
Depending on type of optical fiber 100 100 (white)
mm
660 (red)
25 ... +55 3RG70 12... 3RG70 13...
%/K 0.3
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/103
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO400
K31 design
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
Connection
Switching output

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 } B
Order No.
60 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer)
2
Diffuse sensor with background suppression 3 ... 15 (adjustable via potentiometer)
2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, type A pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 2 3 0.14 mm pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON pnp, light-ON
} } B
Reflex sensor
pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON 200 660 (red, 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON (adjustable polar3 0.14 mm2 pnp, dark-ON via potentio- ized) npn, light-ON meter) npn, dark-ON M8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, type A pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter M8 connector, 3-pole, type A pnp, light-ON pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON Emitter
M8 connector, 3-pole, type A
} }
} } B
B } B
Thru-beam sensor
600 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer)
} } B
} B } B } B
} B } } } }
Depends on FO wire
Accessories
Fiber-optic conductors
660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, pnp, light-ON 3 0.14 mm2 pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON M8 connector, pnp, light-ON 3-pole, type A pnp, dark-ON npn, light-ON npn, dark-ON
3RG70 100AB01 3RG70 100AA01 3RG70 100GB00 3RG70 100GA00 3RG70 107AB01 3RG70 107AA01 3RG70 107GB00 3RG70 107GA00 3RG70 140AB00 3RG70 140AA00 3RG70 140GB00 3RG70 140GA00 3RG70 147AB00 3RG70 147AA00 3RG70 147GB00 3RG70 147GA00 3RG70 110AB01 3RG70 110AA01 3RG70 110GB00 3RG70 110GA00 3RG70 117AB01 3RG70 117AA01 3RG70 117GB00 3RG70 117GA00 3RG70 120AB01 3RG70 120AA01 3RG70 120GB00 3RG70 120GA00 3RG70 120BG01 3RG70 127AB01 3RG70 127AA01 3RG70 127GB00 3RG70 127GA00 3RG70 127BG01 3RG70 130AB00 3RG70 130AA00 3RG70 130GB00 3RG70 130GA00 3RG70 137AB00 3RG70 137AA00 3RG70 137GB00 3RG70 137GA00 3RX7 910
see from page 2/263
Mounting brackets for K30, K31
1) See page 2/127. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99. } Preferred type, available from stock.
I Dimensions
See page 2/106.
2/104
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO400
K30 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 1.2 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Reflex sensor Sensing range 4 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 12 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Sensor for plastic fiber-optic wires Sensing range depends on type of optical fiber (see page 2/263) Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Surplus light Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
400 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 15
mm 200 200 (white)
25 ... +55 3RG70 10...00 3RG70 11...00
%/K 0.3
Operating mode
Thru-beam sensor
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
Depending on type of optical fiber 100 100 (white)
mm
660 (red)
25 ... +55 3RG70 12...00 3RG70 13...00
%/K 0.3
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/105
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO400
K30 design
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range cm
120 (adjustable via potentiometer)
Illuminant nm
Connection
Switching output
Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) pnp npn Light-ON and surplus pnp light function npn Light-ON and pnp dark-ON (antivalent) npn Light-ON and surplus pnp light function npn Light-ON and pnp dark-ON (antivalent) npn

3 3 4 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 }
Order No.
880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 4-pole, type B
} } }
Reflex sensor 400 (adjustable via potentiometer)
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) pnp 3 npn 3 } } }
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 Thru-beam sensor 1200 (adjustable via potentiometer) 880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) pnp 3 npn 3
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 Emitter Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) npn 2 pnp 3 3 } } } } }
3 0.14 mm2 M8 connector, 4-pole, type B
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 Emitter Sensor Depends for plastic on FO wire optical fibers 660 (red) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 0.14 mm2 Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) npn 2 pnp 3 3
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) pnp 3 npn 3 }
Accessories
Mounting brackets for K30, K31 Fiber-optic conductors
1) See page 2/127.
Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 light function npn 4 } }
3RG70 100CC00 3RG70 100HC00 3RG70 100CD00 3RG70 100HD00 3RG70 107CC00 3RG70 107HC00 3RG70 107CD00 3RG70 107HD00 3RG70 110CC00 3RG70 110HC00 3RG70 110CD00 3RG70 110HD00 3RG70 117CC00 3RG70 117HC00 3RG70 117CD00 3RG70 117HD00 3RG70 120CC00 3RG70 120HC00 3RG70 120CD00 3RG70 120HD00 3RG70 120BE00 3RG70 127CC00 3RG70 127HC00 3RG70 127CD00 3RG70 127HD00 3RG70 127BE00 3RG70 130CC00 3RG70 130HC00 3RG70 130CD00 3RG70 130HD00 3RG70 137CC00 3RG70 137HC00 3RG70 137CD00 3RG70 137HD00 3RX7 910
See from page 2/263
} Preferred type, available from stock
I Dimensions
3RG70 100..00, 3RG70 120..00
For M 4 14 21 30 21 4,5
3RG70 110..00
For M 4 21 14 30 21 5 4,5
3RG70 130..00
For M 4 21 30 21 4,5 4,5
NSD00829
NSD00832
NSD00828
21 30
21 30
20
20
20
3RG70 107..00, 3RG70 127..00

For M 4
14 21
4,5
3RG70 117..00
For M 4 14 21 30 21 5 4,5
4,5
3RG70 137..00
For M 4 21 30 21 4,5 4,5
30 21
4,5
NSD00830
NSD00831
NSD00833
21 30
20
21 30
20
20
4,5
2/106
Siemens FS 10 2009
4,5
4,5
15
21
15
21
15
21
21 30
4,5
15
21
15
21
15
21
21 30
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
I Overview
C40, L50, L50HF, C50.
I Selection table
2
SIMATIC PXO500
C40 Operating mode

Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Color sensor
L50
L50HF
L50HF advanced
C50
Sensing range
1.2 cm ... 3.2 cm 5 cm ... 11 cm 12 cm ... 15 cm 20 cm ... 30 cm 60 cm ... 70 cm 1 m ... 1.5 m 4 m ... 6 m 20 m ... 50 m

ET 200S (via IQ-Sense)
Output
pnp npn

3x

Analog
Direct communication with the controller Operating voltage

24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC
Connection
Cable
M12 connector
Special features
Timing function Surplus light emission Transparent objects
Illuminant

2/108
Red light Laser light, red Incandescent light
2/110
2/112
2/112
See page
2/114
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/107
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
C40 design
I Overview
Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 70 cm (adjustable via "teach-in") Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 5 to 25 cm (adjustable via "teach-in")
Reflex sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable via "teach-in") Reflex sensor for transparent objects Sensing range 1 m (adjustable via "teach-in") External "teach-in" Supplied with mounting bracket, without reflector.
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
70 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 35 200 1000 0.5 660 (red) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (PBTP) IP67
5 ... 25 (adjustable) 100 100 (gray) 25 250 200 2.5
mm 200 200 (white)
25 ... +55 3RG72 40...00 3RG72 44...00
%/K 0.1
Operating mode
Reflex sensor for transparent objects
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
600 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 35 200 1000 0.5 660 (red, polarized) Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67
100 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84
mm Reflector type D 84
25 ... +55 3RG72 41...00 3RG72 41...52
%/K 0.1
2/108
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
C40 design
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
Sensing range cm
Illuminant nm
Connection
Switching output

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 } } } }
Order No.
70 660 (red) (adjustable via "teach-in") 5 ... 25 660 (red) (adjustable via "teach-in")
Reflex sensor 600 660 (red, with polariza- (adjustable polarized) tion filter via "teach-in") Reflex sensor 100 660 (red, for transpar- (adjustable polarized) ent objects via "teach-in")
Communication-capable proximity switches with C40 IQ-Sense design

Diffuse sensor 70 660 (red) for connection to the 4 IQSense sensor module for connection to the 4 IQSense sensor module
M12 connector, pnp, light-ON or 4-pole, type F dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON M12 connector, pnp, light-ON or 4-pole, type F dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON M12 connector, pnp, light-ON or 4-pole, type F dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON M12 connector, pnp, light-ON or 4-pole, type F dark-ON npn, light-ON or dark-ON IQ-Sense
3RG72 403CH00 3RG72 403HH00 3RG72 443CH00 3RG72 443HH00 3RG72 413CH00 3RG72 413HH00 3RG72 413CH52 3RG72 413HH52
} B
3SF72 403JQ00 3SF72 413JQ00
Reflex sensor 600
660 (red)
IQ-Sense
} B
1) See page 2/127. } Preferred type, available from stock. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
I Dimensions
3RG72 4.3....
LED
NSD0_ 01184a
40 46 55
5,3x7,3 30 40 M 12x1 40
69
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/109
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
L50 design
I Overview
Visible laser light (red) Laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3 to 15 cm (adjustable via potentiometer) Reflex sensor Sensing range 20 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Supplied without mounting material
Diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range 4.5 to 8.5 cm (adjustable via potentiometer)
Operating mode
Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression
Laser reflex sensor
Sensing range Standard target/reflector Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Switching status Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type
cm V mA mA Hz ms nm
3 ... 15 (adjustable) 10 ... 30 (max. 10 % residual ripple) 50 200 2500 < 0.2 650 (red laser light) Yellow LED Red LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67
2000 (adjustable) Reflector type RL 50
mm 100 100 (white)
20 ... +45 3RG70 56...00 3RG70 57...00
%/K 0.1
Operating mode
Sensing range Resolution Linearity Measuring spot diameter (at 65 mm distance) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Analog output Output current, max. Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Surplus light Operating voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C Red LED Green LED mm m ms mm V mA V mA Hz ms nm

45 ... 85 (adjustable) 80 < 1% of measuring range (40 mm) < 0.8 18 ... 28 (max. 10 % residual ripple) 35 0 ... 10 3 500 1 650 50 10 20
Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 0 ... +45 3RG70 56.CM00 3RG70 56.CM03 m/K 18
2/110
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
L50 design
Operating mode Sensing range/ resolution Illuminant Connection nm Switching output/ analog output
pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn

5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 15 15 15 15 } } } } } }
Order No.
Laser diffuse 3 ... 15 cm 650 (red 2 m cable, sensor with (adjustable via laser light) PUR, background potentiometer) 4 0.25 mm2 suppression
Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, Light-ON and 4-pole, type F dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Laser reflex 2000 cm 650 (red 2 m cable, Light-ON and sensor (adjustable via laser light) PUR, dark-ON potentiometer) 4 0.25 mm2 (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function M12 connector, Light-ON and 4-pole, type F dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON and surplus light function Laser diffuse 45 ... 85 mm/ 650 (red 6 m cable, analog sensor 80 m laser light) PVC, 0 10 V, 2 with analog 4 0.34 mm , rising signal 45 ... 85 mm/ shielded output 20 m 45 ... 85 mm/ 80 m 45 ... 85 mm/ 20 m Mounting brackets for L50
1) See page 2/127. } Preferred type, available from stock.
3RG70 560CC00 3RG70 560HC00 3RG70 560CD00 3RG70 560HD00 3RG70 563CC00 3RG70 563HC00 3RG70 563CD00 3RG70 563HD00 3RG70 570CC00 3RG70 570HC00 3RG70 570CD00 3RG70 570HD00 3RG70 573CC00 3RG70 573HC00 3RG70 573CD00 3RG70 573HD00 3RG70 561CM00 3RG70 561CM03 3RG70 563CM00 3RG70 563CM03 3RX7 302
650 (red M12 connector, analog laser light) 4-pole, type F 0 10 V, rising signal
Accessories
I Dimensions
3RG70 5.0..00, 3RG70 561..0.
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs
3RG70 5.3..0.
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs
50
50
46 44
NSD0 00864
46 44
NSD0 00863
16
40 44
M 12x1
M 12x1 40 44
3RG70 56.CM0.
NSD00865
Measuring range
10 V
0V
45 mm
85 mm
4,3
4,3
16
27,5
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/111
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
L50 HF, L50HF advanced designs
I Overview
Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with analog output, parameterizable using teach-in buttons Resolution < 0.1% of full-scale value Two digital channels, can be set as 2 switching outputs or 1 switching output and 1 trigger input Analog output 4 to 20 mA (scaling can be set) Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output
Sensing range Resolution Linearity Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Analog output Output current per switching output Recommended load Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) LEDs Ready for operation Status display Switching state, input/output Status display, trigger input Object valid Timer function active Measured value centering active Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Connection Type
mm
30 ... 100
80 ... 300
%/MBE < 0.1 %/MBE < 0.25 mm V mA mA mA W Hz ms nm 1.5 x 3.25 18 ... 30 40 4 ... 20 100 500 1000 <1 650 Green LED Red LED Yellow LED (2 x) Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Molded plastic (ABS) IP67 C %/K -10 ... +60 0.02 M12 connector, 8-pole, Type O 3RG70 563NQ00 3RG70 563NQ61 2 x 4.5
2/112
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
L50 HF, L50HF advanced designs
Selection and Ordering data
Operating mode Sensing Design range mm

Laser diffuse 30 ... 100 sensor with analog output L50 HF Laser diffuse 80 ... 300 sensor with analog output L50 HF advanced
650 (red laser light)
Analog output mA

pnp 20 }
Order No.
M12 connector, 4 ... 20 8-pole, Type O M12 connector, 4 ... 20 8-pole, Type O
3RG70 563NQ00 3RG70 563NQ61
pnp 20
Accessories
HF L50 design
Mounting brackets for L50 HF Cable plug, shielded, 8 0.25 mm2

1) See page 2/127.
} }
3RX7 302 3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0
I Dimensions
3RG70 563NQ..
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs
50
NSD0 00864
46 44
16
M 12x1
M 12x1 40 44
4,3
27,5
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/113
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO500
C50 design
I Overview
Color sensor with three individually adjustable switch outputs 3 color ranges can be learned Long-term stable and neutral color white-light transmitter LEDs 5 tolerance levels selectable Sensing range 12 to 32 mm Transparent objects with reflection film detectable Trigger function via activation input External Teach-in
Supplied without mounting material and without reflector
Operating mode
Color sensor
Response time Pulse stretching/dropout delay Sensing range tolerance for light spot 4 mm Color resolution tolerance Illuminant Light spot diameter at a distance of 22 mm Ambient light limit Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature range Storage temperature range Type of connection Max. permissible lead length Weight
10 ms 50 ms 6 mm for mean tolerance Adjustable in 5 stages White light, pulsed 4 mm EN 60947-5-2 ABS IP67 -10 ... +55 C -20 ... +80 C M12 connector, 8-pole 100 m 40 g
Sensing range for light spot 4 mm 12 ... 32 mm Operating voltage Max. residual ripple Reverse polarity protection, shortcircuit protection Current consumption during no-load operation Switching outputs Max. output current Max. voltage drop at the switching output Power-up delay Switching frequency Switching status indicator CH1 ... CH3 Operating voltage indicator Tolerance level indicator Tol1 ... Tol5 DC 12 ... 28 V 10% yes 40 mA at 24 V DC Q1 ... Q3, PNP NO contact 100 mA < 2.4 V < 300 ms 500 Hz 3 x Yellow LED Green LED 3 x Red LED

Operating mode
Sensing range mm
Illuminant
White light, pulsed
Connection

17 }
Order No.
Color sensor 12 ... 32 PXO560 with 3 switching outputs
M12 connector, 3 x pnp 8-pole, Type O
3RG70 50-3NB00
Accessories
Mounting bracket for form C50 Cable plug, shielded, 8 x 0.25 mm, 5 m Reflection film for detection of transparent objects
1) See page 2/127.
} } }
3RX7302 3RX8000-0CB81-1GF0 3RX7307-0AB00
I Dimensions
3RG70 50-3NB00
17 4 50 Pot. + LEDs
50
NSD0 00864
46 44
16
M 12x1
M 12x1 40 44
2/114
Siemens FS 10 2009
4,3
27,5
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
I Overview
K80, L80HF, L90L.
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO600
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor Diffuse sensor with background suppression Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor
K80
L80HF
L90L
Sensing range
1 m ... 1.5 m 2 m ... 3 m 4 m ... 6 m 12 m ... 15 m 20 m ... 50 m
60 cm ... 75 cm

Output
pnp npn Relay


Analog
Direct communication with the controller Operating voltage

24 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC
Connection
Terminals
M12 connector
Special features
Timing function Surplus light emission
Illuminant
Red light Infrared light Laser light, red Laser light, infrared Zone 2/22
2/119
Approval for hazardous area See page
2/120
2/116
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/115
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
K80 design
I Overview
Versions for use in potentially explosive environments acc. to 94/9/EG (ATEX exists): Zone 2 (gases, vapors, mist) according to classification II 3G Zone 22 (dust atmosphere, non-conductive dust) according to classification II 3D Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 2 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 0.2 to 1 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Reflex sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Supplied without reflector "Advanced" version 1 to 12 m Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable via potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC or 240 V AC/DC Inputs and outputs Electronics output pnp or npn - Programmable as light-ON or dark-ON - Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Relay output 20 to 320 V AC/DC Timing function (delayed pick-up or drop-out, pulse shaping) Enabling input for test purposes Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode
Sensing range Standard target Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Operating voltage range (AC/DC) No-load power, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency, max. Switching time, max. Wavelength (illuminant) Switching state/surplus light function display Enclosure material Degree of protection Approval for Ex Zones 2/22 Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C %/K
Diffuse sensor
m mm V mA V VA mA Hz ms nm 2 (adjustable) 400 400 (white) 10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR) LED yellow/LED green Molded plastic (PBTP) IP67 no 5 ... +55 0.3 3RG72 00-...00, 3RG72 10-...00 3RG72 10-6MC00 no 5 ... +55 yes 5 ... +40 no 5 ... +55 20 ... 265 2 2000 (at 240 V AC) 20 20 10 ... 36 30 200 200 1000 0.5

0.2 ... 1 (adjustable) 200 200 (white) 10 ... 36 45 200 250 2 880 (IR)
3RG72 00-3CC00- 3RG72 04-...00, 0XB4 3RG72 14-...00
Operating mode
Sensing range Reflector Operating voltage range (DC) No-load current I0, max. Operating voltage range (AC/DC) No-load power, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency, max. Switching time, max. Wavelength (illuminant) Switching state/surplus light function display Enclosure material Degree of protection Approval for Ex Zones 2/22 Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Type C %/K m mm V mA V VA mA Hz ms nm

6/12 (adjustable) Reflector type D 84 10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5 20 ... 265 2 2000 (at 240 V AC) 20 20 10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5 10 ... 36 30 200 1000 0.5 880 (IR)
Thru-beam sensor
50 (adjustable) 20 ... 320 2 2000 (at 240 V AC) 20 20 10 ... 36 200 1000 0.5
660 (red, polarized) LED yellow/LED green Molded plastic (PBTP) IP67 no 5 ... +55 0.3 3RG72 01-...00, 3RG72 11-6MC00, 3RG72 01-...61, 3RG72 11-6MC61 3RG72 11-...00, 3RG72 11-...61 3RG72 013CC..-0XB4 no 5 ... +55 yes 5 ... +40
no 5 ... +55 3RG72 02...00, 3RG72 12...00
no 5 ... +55 3RG72 12-6MC00, 3RG72 02-6FG00
yes 5 ... +40 3RG72 02-0XB4, 3RG72 12-0XB4
2/116
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
K80 design
Operating mode
Diffuse sensor
K80 design
Sensing range m
Illuminant nm
Connection
Switching output

pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn 11 11 B B } B 5 5 8 8 B B }
Order No.
880 (IR) 2 (adjustable via potentiometer)
M12 connector, 4-pole, type F M12 connector, 5-pole, type G Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole Pg 11, 5-pole
Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0,01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Relay, Light-ON and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0,01 ... 1 s) Light-ON and dark-ON (antivalent)
3RG72 003CC00 3RG72 003HC00 3RG72 103DK00 3RG72 103EK00 3RG72 006CC00 3RG72 006HC00 3RG72 106DK00 3RG72 106EK00 3RG72 106MC00
Relay 10
K80 design
Diffuse sensor with background suppression 0.2 ... 1 880 (IR) (adjustable via potentiometer) M12 connector, 4-pole, Type F M12 connector, 5-pole, Type G Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole
pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn
5 5 8 8
3RG72 043CC00 3RG72 043HC00 3RG72 143DK00 3RG72 143EK00 3RG72 046CC00 3RG72 046HC00 3RG72 146DK00 3RG72 146EK00 3RG72 013CC00 3RG72 013HC00 3RG72 113DK00 3RG72 113EK00 3RG72 016CC00 3RG72 016HC00 3RG72 116DK00 3RG72 116EK00 3RG72 116MC00 3RG72 013CC61 3RG72 016CC61 3RG72 116MC61
} 11 11
K80 design
Reflex sensor 6 (adjustable via potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) M12 connector, 4-pole, Type F M12 connector, 5-pole, Type G Pg 11, 4-pole Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole
pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn pnp npn
5 5 8 8 11 11 11 11 10
} B B } B B } B
12 (adjustable via potentiometer)
Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Pg 11, Relay, Light-ON 5-pole and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole, (antivalent) Type F Pg 11, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole (antivalent) Pg 11, Relay, Light-ON 5-pole and dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s)
pnp
pnp Relay 10
} } B
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/117
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
K80 design
Operating mode Sensing range m Illuminant nm Connection Switching output Circuit diagram1) number
pnp 5 npn 5 pnp 6 pnp 11 npn 11 pnp 11 npn 11 10 7 11 11 } B
Order No.
K80 design
Thru-beam sensor
880 (IR) M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 50 4-pole, (antivalent) (adjustable via Type F potentiometer) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Pg 11, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole (antivalent) Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Relay, Light-ON and darkON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s) 880 (IR) M12 connector, Emitter DC with 50 4-pole, Type F enabling input (adjustable via potentiometer) Pg 11, Emitter DC with 3-pole enabling input Pg 11, Emitter AC/DC with 3-pole enabling input 2 (can be set with potentiometer) 6 (can be set with potentiometer) 880 (IR) M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole, (antivalent) type F 660 (red, polar.) M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole, (antivalent) Type F M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole, (antivalent) Type F M12 connector, Light-ON and dark-ON 4-pole, (antivalent) Type F Light-ON or dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s) Sender with enable input for connection to the 4IQSense sensor module for connection to the 4IQSense sensor module Pg 11, with enabling input, 5-pole Pg 11, 5-pole
3RG72 023CC00 3RG72 023HC00 3RG72 123DK00 3RG72 026CC00
B B } B } } } B
3RG72 026HC00 3RG72 126DK00 3RG72 126EK00 3RG72 126MC00 3RG72 023BG00 3RG72 026BG00 3RG72 026FG00 3RG72 003CC00-0XB4 3RG72 013CC00-0XB4 3RG72 013CC61-0XB4 3RG72 023CC00-0XB4 3RG72 123DK00-0XB4 3RG72 023BG00-0XB4 3SF72 103JQ00 3SF72 143JQ00 3SF72 113JQ00 3RX7 303
Thru-beam sensor Emitter
K80 ATEX design

pnp 5
pnp 5
Thru-beam sensor
12 (can be set 660 with potentio- (red, polarmeter) ized) 50 (can be set 880 (IR) with potentiometer)
pnp 5
pnp 5 pnp 6 7 9 9
} } B } } B } B
Communication-capable proximity switches with K80 IQ-Sense form

Diffuse sensor 2 0.2 ... 1 Diffuse sensor with background suppression 8 Reflex sensor 880 (IR) M12 connector, 4-pole, Type F 880 (IR) M12 connector, 4-pole, Type F 660 (red, polar.)
M12 connector, for connection to the 4IQ4-pol., Type F Sense sensor module
} B
Accessories
Mounting brackets for K80
1) See page 2/127.
}
B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
3RG72 ..3..00, 3RG72 ..3..00-0XB4
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00846b
3RG72 ..6..00
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00848b
83 73 62
83 73 62
30
13,2
30
5,5 10 20 36 M 12x1 50 25
5,5 10 20 36 50 PG 11
25
2/118
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
L80HF design
I Overview
Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 2 according to EN 60947-5-2 Diffuse sensor with analog output, parameterizable using teach-in buttons Resolution < 0.1% of full-scale value Two digital channels, adjustable as 2 switching outputs or 1 switching output and 1 trigger input Analog output 4 to 20 mA (scaling can be set) Supplied without mounting material
Operating mode
Sensing range Resolution Linearity Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Operating voltage range (DC) No-load supply current I0, max. Analog output Output current per switching output Recommended load Switching frequency Switching time Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Ready for operation/Status display Switching state, input/output Status display, trigger input Object valid Timer function active Measured value centering active Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature Temperature coefficient Connection Type mm %/MBE %/MBE mm V mA mA mA W Hz ms nm 250 ... 750 < 0.1 < 0.25 2 x 4.5 18 ... 30 40 4 ... 20 100 500 1000 <1 650 Green LED/Red LED Yellow LED (2 x) Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED PBT IP67 -10 ... +60 0,02 M12 connector, 8-pole, type O 3RG72 563NQ00
C %/K

Operating mode Design
Laser diffuse sensor with analog output L80HF
Sensing range mm
250 ... 750
Analog output

}
Order No.
M12 connector, 4 ... 20 mA pnp 20 8-pole, type O
3RG72 563NQ00
Accessories
Mounting brackets for L80 HF Cable plug, shielded, 8 0.25 mm2
1) See page 2/127.
} }
3RX7 303 3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0
I Dimensions
3RG72 563NQ00
65 Pot. + LEDs
NSD0 00846b
83 73 62
30 13,2 5 5,5 10 20 36 M 12x1 50 25
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/119
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
SIMATIC PXO650 L90L
I Overview
Measuring laser sensor based on the principle of optical running-time measurement Measuring laser with IR light; laser class 1 Pilot laser for adjustment with visible red light; laser class 2 Wired via M12 4-pole or 5-pole connector Range 6 m; range with reflector 30 m Rated operating voltage 24 V DC 1 or 2 solid-state outputs pnp NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in" Analog output 4 to 20 mA Timer function
Sensing range
Standard target/reflector Operating mode Light spot diameter (at end of sensing range) Reproducibility Slow Fast Operating voltage range No-load supply current Io, max. Rated operating current Ie Analog output Response time Slow Fast Wavelength (illuminant) Measuring laser Pilot laser Displays Switching status Operating voltage Operating mode Adjustment menu Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature during operation Ambient temperature during storage Temperature coefficient Type
0.2 6 m
white 90%, 100 x 100 mm Distance sensor/jogging 4 x 12 mm 10 mm 15 mm 18 ... 30 V DC 125 mA at 24 V DC 100 mA 80 ms 13 ms
0.2 6 m
0.2 30 m
R250 reflector, 250 x 250 mm Distance sensor/ reflex sensor 45 x 60 mm 5 mm 10 mm
4 20 mA 65 ms 13 ms
905 nm, IR, invisible, class 1 650 nm, red, visible, class 2 Green LED Yellow LED Orange LED Plastic ABS IP67 -20 +50 C -40 +80 C 0.3%/K 6GR1654-3AD20 6GR1654-3CH20 6GR1654-3CH21 4 x red LEDs 2 yellow LEDs
2/120
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO600
SIMATIC PXO650 L90L
Sensing range m
0.2 6 0.2 6 0.2 30
Connection
M12 connector, 4-pole, type F M12 connector, 5-pole, type F M12 connector, 5-pole, type G
Switching output Analog output mA

1 x light-ON or dark-ON 2 x light-ON or dark-ON 2 x light-ON or dark-ON 4 ... 20 4 ... 20

pnp 12 pnp 19 pnp 19
Order No.
6GR1654-3AD20 6GR1654-3CH20 6GR1654-3CH21
SIMATIC PXO560 L90L
1) See page 2/127.
I Dimensions
24 52
M5x8
42
95
12,3
FS10_00278
send
20
27,43 24
receive
5,8
5,75
42
43
M12x1 81,5 93
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/121
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO800
I Overview

GL fork sensor, LV70 fiber-optic conductor sensor.
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXO800
Operating mode
Thru-beam sensor For plastic fiber-optic wires
GL
LV70

2/123
Sensing range
Depending on fiber-optic wire 1.2 cm ... 3.2 cm 5 cm ... 11 cm 12 cm ... 15 cm
Output
pnp
Operating voltage
24 V DC
Connection
M8 connector Cable
Special features
Surplus light emission
Illuminant
Red light
See page
2/125
2/122
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO830 GL
I Overview
PXO830 GL fork sensor for detecting small objects. Molded plastic enclosure with screw-on or dovetail fastening. Wired with 3 or 4-pole M8 connector. 4 different fork widths: - GL30 = 30 mm - GL50 = 50 mm - GL80 = 80 mm - GL120 = 120 mm NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in". Versions with external "teach-in".
2
PXO830 GL50
50
Operating mode Fork width Operating voltage range No-load supply current Io, max. Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency Wavelength (illuminant) Switching status indicators Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage Temperature coefficient Type C C %/K mm V DC mA mA Hz nm
PXO830 GL30
Thru-beam sensor 30 10 30 30 100 2000 640 (red, visible) 4 x yellow LEDs Plastic ABS IP67 -20 +60 -20 +80 0.3 6GR1802-....
PXO830 GL80
80
PXO830 GL120
120
6GR1804-....
6GR1806-....
6GR1808-....
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/123
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO830 GL
mm
30 30 50 50 80 80 120 120 SIMATIC PXO830 GL
1) See page 2/127.
Fork width Connection

M 8 connector, 3-pole, Type A M 8 connector, 4-pole, Type B M 8 connector, 3-pole, Type A M 8 connector, 4-pole, Type B M 8 connector, 3-pole, Type A M 8 connector, 4-pole, Type B M 8 connector, 3-pole, Type A M 8 connector, 4-pole, Type B
Switching output
Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON Light-ON or dark-ON
External Circuit "teach-in" diagram1) number

pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes pnp pnp yes 1 14 1 14 1 14 1 14
Order No.
6GR1802-7AD00 6GR1802-7BD05 6GR1804-7AD00 6GR1804-7BD05 6GR1806-7AD00 6GR1806-7BD05 6GR1808-7AD00 6GR1808-7BD05
I Dimensions
G
10
FS10_00279
B A
4
Teach-in 4,2 8 4,5 1* C 4,5 12

5
1*
All dimensions in mm
MLFB 6GR1802 6GR1804 6GR1806 6GR1808
A Fork width 30 50 80 120
B
50 70 100 140
C
30 50 80 120
D
34 54 54 54
G
28 2 x 28 3 x 28
59.5 20 79.5 20 79.5 20 79.5 20
2/124
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO840 LV70
I Overview
Fiber-optic wire sensor for snapping onto a DIN rail to DIN46277-3. Plastic fiber-optic wires 3RX7.... may be used. Connection with cable or M8 connector. The function and range depend upon the type of fiber-optic wire used (see data of your selected fiber-optic wire) Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Electronic output pnp NO or NC contact, adjustable via "teach-in" LV70A with analog output 0 10 V
Operating mode Sensing range Standard target/reflector Operating mode Operating voltage range (DC) No-load supply current I0, max. Rated operating current Ie Analog output Switching frequency Standard Fast mode Fine mode High Distance mode Wavelength (illuminant) Indicators Switching status Operating voltage Configuration Key lock Make/break function Adjustment mode Timer function Function mode Display Enclosure material Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage Temperature coefficient Type %/K C Hz Hz Hz Hz nm V DC mA mA V
PXO840 LV70
Depending on fiber-optic wire Depending on fiber-optic wire Standard 10 ... 30 20 at 24 V 100 1500 660, red, visible Yellow LED Green LED no Plastic (ABS) IP64 -20 ... +60 -20 ... +80 0.3 6GR1810-.BD05
PXO840 LV70HF
PXO840 LV70A
Sensor/thru-beam sensor, depending on fiber-optic wire
Standard, Fast, Fine, High Distance 25 at 24 V 0 10 1000 8000 125 125
Yellow LED Green LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED 4-character, red
6GR1811-7BD05
6GR1811-0CJ05
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/125
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXO800
SIMATIC PXO840 LV70
Connection Illuminant nm Switching output Analog output
0 10 V

pnp 14 pnp 14 pnp 14 pnp 18
Order No.
Cable, 2 m PVC, 660, red Light-ON or 4 x 0.14 mm dark-ON
6GR1810-0BD05 6GR1810-7BD05 6GR1811-7BD05 6GR1811-0CJ05
M8 connector, 4-pole, type B M8 connector, 4-pole, type B
660, red Light-ON or dark-ON 660, red Light-ON or dark-ON
Cable, 2 m PVC, 660, red Light-ON or 5 x 0.14 mm dark-ON
Accessories
3RX7 plastic fiber-optic conductor
1) See page 2/127.
see page 2/264
I Dimensions
10 3,4
65
30
FS10_00280
18,65
18,65 32 35,4
2/126
Siemens FS 10 2009
24,3
10,4
84
Siemens AG 2008

Schematics
I Schematics
Circuit diagram 1
N S D 0 0 8 6 7 a
Circuit diagram 2
NSD00873a
B N
4
(1 ) (4 ) (3 )
+ U b
O u tp u t lig h t- O N /d a r k - O N
B K
1 3
M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable
BN (1)
4
+ Ub Enable input 0V
BK (4)
1 3
M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable
B U
0 V
BU (3)
Circuit diagram 3
NSD00868b
Circuit diagram 4
+ Ub Output dark-ON Output light-ON 0V
NSD00874a
BN (1)
2 1 3 4
WH (2) BK (4) BU (3)
M8 connector, Type B Cable
BN (1)
2 1 3 4
+ Ub Output surplus light Output light-ON 0V
WH (2) BK (4) BU (3)
M8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Cable
Circuit diagram 5
NSD0 00869a
Circuit diagram 6
NSD00875a
2 3
1 4
BN (1) WH (2) BK (4) BU (3)
+ Ub
Output dark-ON Output light-ON

0V
M12 connector, Type F, K, L Cable
BN (1)
2 3 1 4
+ Ub Output surplus light Output light-ON/dark-ON 0V
WH (2) BK (4) BU (3)
M12 connector, Type F, K, L Cable
Circuit diagram 7
NSD0 00870a
Circuit diagram 8
NSD00876a
BN (1)
2 3 1 4
+ Ub
M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L Cable
BN (1)
2 3 1 4
+U b Output surplus light Output light-ON/dark-ON 0V Enable input
WH (2) BK (4) BU (3) GR (5)
M12 connector, Type G, M
BK (4) BU (3)
Enable input
0V
Circuit diagram 9
NSD00871a
Circuit diagram 10
N S D 0 0 8 7 2
BN (1) + Ub
2 3 1 4
M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, M Cable
(1 ) (2 ) (3 ) (4 ) (5 )
Screw-type terminals
U C = 1 5 ... 2 6 4 V N C ( r e la y ) C o m m o n ( r e la y ) N O ( r e la y )
BU (3) 0 V
Circuit diagram 11
NSD00878
Circuit diagram 12
NSD00879
BN (1) WH (2) BK (4) BU (3) GR (5)
+U b Output surplus light Output light-ON/dark-ON 0V Enable input
Screw-type terminals
BN (1)
2 3 1 4
+ Ub Output light-ON/dark-ON
M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable
BK (4) BU (3)
0V
Circuit diagram 13
NSD00886
Circuit diagram 14
NSD0 01084
BN (1)
2 3 1 4
+ Ub Output light-ON/dark-ON 0V
WH (2) BU (3)
M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable
BN (1)
2 1 4 WH (2)
+ U b DC 10 ... 30 V Programming 0V Switching output light-ON/dark-ON
M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole
BU (3)
3 BK (4)
Circuit diagram 15
NSD00894
Circuit diagram 16
+ Ub + Ua _ Ua 0V Shielding
N S D 0 0 1 2 0 5
BN WH YE GN
Cable
2 3
1 4
P IN 1 : + U b P IN 2 : P r o g r a m m in g P IN 3 : 0 V P IN 4 : S w itc h in g o u tp u t lig h t- O N /d a r k - O N
M12 connector, Type G, M
Circuit diagram 17
FS10_00207
Circuit diagram 18
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 2 6 3
5 6 7 1 8 2 4 3
BN (2) +Ub WH (1) Blanking GR (5) Interlock PK (6) Output 3 RD (8) YE (4) Output 2 GN (3) Output 1 BU (7) 0 V
M12 connector, 8-pole, Type O
B N W H B U B K O R
+ U b D C 1 0 ... 3 0 V P r o g r a m m in g 0 V S w itc h in g o u tp u t lig h t- O N /d a r k A n a lo g o u tp u t 0 ... 1 0 V
Cable
Circuit diagram 19
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 2 6 4
Circuit diagram 20
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 1 4 9
B N
2 3 4 1
W H B U B K G Y
(1 ) (2 ) (3 ) (4 ) (5 )
+ U b O u tp u t A 2 , lig h t- O N /d a r k - O N 0 V O u tp u t A 1 , lig h t- O N /d a r k - O N A n a lo g o u tp u t 4 m A ... 2 0 m A
M12 connector, Type F, G
5 6 4 8 1 2 3 7
(L + W H (R S G R (R S P K (6 ) R D (8 ) Y E (4 ) G N (3 ) B U (L B N
) (2 ) 4 8 5 ) (1 ) 4 8 5 ) (5 )
M8 socket connector, Type O, 8-pole
) (7 )
BK BN
= Black = Brown
BU GR or GY
= Blue = Gray
OR RD
= Orange = Red
WH YE
= White = Yellow
PK GN
= Pink = Green
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/127
Siemens AG 2008

D4 and M5 design
Diffuse sensor
S (m) 60 50
NSD00896a
Thru-beam sensor
S (m) a
S
0,30 0,25
NSD00897a
a 0,20 0,15 0,10 0,05

S
40 30 20 10
20
10
10
20
a (mm)
80
40
40
80 a (mm)
M12 design
Diffuse sensor
S (m) 0,4
NSD00898a
Reflex sensor
a
S
Thru-beam sensor
S (m)
NSD00899a
2,0 1,6
a
S
4,5
S (m)
NSD00900a
0,3
3,5
a
S
1,4 1,0 0,2 0,6 1,5 0,1 0,2 2,5
20
10
10
20 a (mm)
40
20
20
40 a (mm)
300
150
150
300 a (mm)
M18 design
Diffuse sensor
S (m) 0,8
NSD00901a
Reflex sensor
a
S
Thru-beam sensor
S (m)
NSD00902a
2,4
a
S
7,0
S (m)
NSD00903a
0,6
1,8
5,0
a
S
0,4
1,2
3,0
0,2
0,6
1,0
80
40
40
80 a (mm)
40
20
20
40 a (mm)
600
300
300
600 a (mm)
2/128
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

K30 and K31 design
Diffuse sensor
S (m)
NSD00904
Reflex sensor
a
S
Thru-beam sensor
S (m)
NSD00905
4,0
a
S
20
S (m)
NSD00906a
1,2
16 12
3,0
0,9
2,0
0,6
1,0
8 4
0,3
200
100 Series K30 Series K31
100
200 a (mm)
80
40
40
80 a (mm)
800
400
400
800 a (mm)
Series K30 Series K31
Series K 30 Series K 31
K80 design
Diffuse sensor
2,4 2,0 1,6 1,2 0,8 0,4 S (m)
NSD00910a
Reflex sensor
S (m) a
S
Thru-beam sensor
S (m)
NSD00911a
6,0 5,0 4,0 3,0 2,0 1,0
a
S
60 50 40 30 20 10
NSD00912b
400
200
200
400 a (mm)
80
40
40
80 a (mm)
2000 1000
1000
2000 a (mm)
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/129
Siemens AG 2008

Glossary for photoelectric proximity switches
I More information
Terms associated with the technology of photoelectric proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC 60947-5-2.
Sensing range
The sensing range is the range within which the operating distance can be set. This term replaces any other previously used terms (sensing range/transmission range). Correction factors The specified sensing ranges of diffuse sensors are achieved with the specified surfaces by using matte white standard paper. The following correction factors (approximate values) apply to other surfaces:
Test card White paper Light-colored wood White plastic Cork Printed newspaper PVC, gray Black plastic 100% 80% 73% 70% 65% 60% 57% 22% Black neoprene Automobile tires Sheet aluminum raw black, anodized matte (brushed) Stainless steel, polished 200% 150% 120% 230% 20% 15%
Anti-interference function
This function prevents mutual interference between photoelectric proximity switches. The specified clearances between the devices does not have to be observed for devices with an antiinterference function. It is therefore possible to align two reflex sensors, for example, with a common reflector.
Function of the outputs

Dark-ON The "dark-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when no light reaches the receiver. Light-ON The "light-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when light reaches the receiver. Antivalent The devices with antivalent output have 2 outputs. One output is dark-ON, and the other is light-ON. Surplus light As an alternative, some devices can be supplied with a different configuration of outputs, one output light-ON and the other for signaling the surplus light.
Enabling input
With photoelectric proximity switches with a test input, the emitter can be switched on or off. Function monitoring can be implemented with appropriate evaluation of the output signal (light barrier: no obstruction of light beam / diffuse sensors: reflecting object exists). To disable the proximity switch, the enabling input must be connected to 0 V. The enabling input does not have to be used for operation.
Output current
The devices are designed for a maximum output current (rated operating current, see Technical specifications). If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload and short-circuit protection will be activated. Destruction of the device is effectively prevented. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have a similar effect to an overload. A minimum load current (smallest operating current) is not required. A built-in pull-up resistor ensures that an output signal is always available.
Ambient light limit

Ambient light is the light produced by external light sources. The luminescence level is measured on the light incidence surface. Thanks to the use of modulated light, the devices are insensitive to ambient light. There is, however, an upper limit for the intensity of any external light which is referred to as the ambient light limit. It is specified for sunlight (unmodulated light) and halogen light (light modulated at twice the frequency of the electricity supply). Reliable operation is not possible above the relevant ambient light limit.
Auto-collimation
With these devices, the optical axes of the emitter and receiver are identical. The device only has one optical axis. This means that there is no blind zone range in front of the proximity switch and the accuracy of the switching point is higher.
Spurious signal suppression

The devices feature spurious signal suppression. It prevents the occurrence of spurious signals from the moment of application of the operating voltage until the moment when the device is ready for operation (approximately 5 ms).
2/130
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
I Notes
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/131
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Inductive proximity switches rugged, accurate and reliable
PXI series
The inductive proximity switches are organized in different product families in accordance with their technical design:
SIMATIC sensors Version product family
PXI200
2
PXI300
For contact-free detection of metal objects, proximity switches are quite simply the most cost-effective solution. If an excellent wire of electricity or magnetism moves towards the sensor or away from it, the signal automatically changes. With their excellent repeat accuracy, they are extremely reliable. And thanks to their wear-free operation and insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water, they have a long service life. We have covered the complete application spectrum with a wide range of different types and ranges.
Sensors for standard applications, typical values: Operating voltage up to 34 V DC Degree of protection up to IP67 Operating distance acc. to standard Sensors for applications with special requirements: Increased operating voltages Higher degrees of protection Above-standard operating distance Sensors without reduction factor Sensors with special approvals: ATEX sensors for hazardous area Zone 2 Sensors with e1 type approval Pressure-resistant sensors up to 500 bar Sensors with analog output
PXI400 PXI600 PXI900
Highlights
Extremely compact and rugged High degree of protection (IP67/IP68/IP69K) Correction factor 1 High sensing ranges Fast switching frequencies Flexible mounting Especially suitable for small spaces Can be used all over the world: UL/CSA approvals
I Application
Inductive proximity switches are the low-cost solution for noncontact detection of metal objects. They are used in sectors in which metal components play an important role, e.g. In the automotive industry In mechanical engineering In the robotics industry In conveyor systems In the paper and printing industry The induction principle and the experience gained by Siemens over many years have made the inductive proximity switches what they are: extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to a lack of wearing parts as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water.
Configurator
A configurator for inductive proximity switches is available in the Mall. Based on the technical features required, the desired product can be quickly and easily selected, placed in the shopping cart and ordered. The configurator can be reached by the following link: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
Approvals
3RG40, 3RG41 devices with M 12 or M 18 connectors as well as terminal compartments are UL and CSA listed. For a complete overview, see the Appendix in the FS 10 Catalog.

The PXI600 inductive proximity switches are approved according to EU Guideline 94/9/EG (ATEX) Appendix VIII The approval is for: Gas EX II 3G EEx nA II T6x and Dust EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C The functionality of the inductive proximity switches with ATEX approval is identical to that of the standard proximity switches.
Sensors with e1 type approval

In the product family SIMATIC PXI, proximity switches with e1 type approval according to the guideline 72/245/EEC are used in motor vehicles. The functionality of proximity switches with e1 approval is identical to that of standard proximity switches.
2/132
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Personal safety
Use of the inductive proximity switches is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the proximity switch.
NSD0_00801
I Design
Selection
When selecting an inductive proximity switch, first the suitable product family (PXI200, PXI300, etc.) for the requirements must be selected according to the overview. In the product families the proximity switches are sorted in ascending order based on their operating distance. Here it must be considered that the specified operating distance is according to the standard. If elements are used that are smaller than the standard target or are made of different materials, the operating distances become smaller in practical applications (see under "Further information", keywords "Standard target", "Operating distance", "Reduction factors"). Most inductive proximity switches are available in different designs: For flush and non-flush-mounting With 2, 3, or 4 wires pnp or npn switching As NO or NC contact With connection by means of a plug-in connector (M12 or combination connector 8 mm), or with integrated cable (for details, see "Further information")
Recognition of broken drills
Accessories
A cable box is required for sensors with connection plug. They are listed in the chapter "Accessories". The suitable cable box is identified by the plug type code. This code is included in the order data of the sensors and in the order data of the cable boxes. Further accessories are usually not required (fastening nuts are supplied together with cylindrical sensors).
Recognition of positioning screws on the wheel for velocity or direction control
Mounting
Inductive proximity switches can be mounted in any position. However, mounting positions where metallic objects (e.g. bore chips) can deposit on the sensing area are not permissible. If sensors are affixed with nuts, the maximum tightening torques must be adhered to. Otherwise the proximity switch could be damaged.
Design M8
Recognition of the valve position (completely open or closed)
Material
Brass Stainless steel Brass Molded plastic Stainless steel
Tightening torque Nm
2 5 10 1 25 0.5 20 3 50 40 5 100
M12 M14 M18 M30
Molded plastic Brass Molded plastic Stainless steel Brass Molded plastic Stainless steel
Recognition of cans and lids
Connecting cables
Generally speaking, the cables used are highly flexible with oil-resistant, polyurethane (PUR) outer sheaths and a standard length of 2 m. Please order devices with a PVC cable for applications in which cables will come into contact with acid or lye. For devices intended for use as per UL and CSA, order a PVC cable. Cables in alternative lengths and materials can be supplied on request.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/133
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Do not route proximity switch connecting cables in a cable duct that runs parallel to cables that are used to switch inductive loads (e.g. contactor coils, solenoid valves, motors) or to conduct currents from electronic motorized operating mechanisms. Keep cables as short as possible; however, when routed under ideal conditions (low coupling capacitance, minimal interference voltages), they may have a length of up to 300 m.
The following measures may be taken to reduce the effect of interference: Distance from cables causing interference > 100 mm Shields Coils (of contactors, relays, solenoid valves) are wired with RC elements or varistors.
Field attenuated
Electrical connection
See under "Circuit diagrams", page 2/242. This number of the respective associated circuit diagram is listed in the selection tables of the proximity switches. For further circuits, refer to "Typical circuit diagrams".
Hysteresis H
AC/DC Ambient temperature During operation During storage Shock resistance Resistance to vibration Reduction factor
General technical specifications

Max. permissible cable length (unshielded)
H 0.2 sr
100 m/300 m 25 ... +85 C 1) 2) 40 ... +85 C 1) 30 g, 18 ms duration 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude
Minimum clearances
To prevent the proximity switches from switching without object, it is absolutely essential that the clearances around the sensing area of metallic objects are unobstructed. Furthermore, the minimum clearance to adjacent inductive sensors must be ensured (see diagrams in the selection tables).
Degrees of protection
See "Further information".
I Function
In the proximity switch, a high-frequency alternating field is generated, which emerges from the "sensing area" of the proximity switch. The size of this alternating field determines the "sensing range" of the switch. The approach of an electrically and/or magnetically conductive material attenuates this field. Both states (field attenuated or not attenuated) are evaluated in the proximity switch and result in a signal change at the output.
Proximity switch for flush or non-flush mounting (typical values) - Stainless steel - Aluminum - Copper - Brass Proximity switch without a reduction factor Voltage drop 2-wire proximity switch 3-wire proximity switch 4-wire proximity switch Approvals 8V 2.5 V 2.5 V IEC 60947-5-2 EN 60947-5-2 (VDE 0660, Part 208) 0.7 ... 0.9 0.35 ... 0.5 0.2 ... 0.4 0.3 ... 0.6 1
1) Up to +70 C for some proximity switches; see selection and ordering data. 2) At ambient temperatures of > 50 C, the output current for some proximity switches is restricted; see selection and ordering data. Field not attenuated
2/134
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
I Notes
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/135
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Cylindrical designs 3 mm 4 mm
2/140 2/141 2/141 2/144 2/152 2/142, 2/143 2/146, 2/147 2/146 2/148, 2/149 2/152 2/155, 2/156 2/158 2/153, 2/154
Design SIMATIC PXI200

0.6 mm 0.8 mm 1 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm
M5
6,5 mm
M8
8 mm
M12
12 mm
M14
see page
SIMATIC PXI300
0.6 mm 1 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 15 mm 20 mm 22 mm 25 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm 30/40 mm 25/40 mm (selectable) 50 mm 65 mm 2/172 2/172 2/172 2/175 2/177 2/178 2/173, 2/174 2/174
see page
2/177 2/178
2/176 2/1802/183 2/181 2/184
2/187
2/187 2/195
SIMATIC PXI400
1.5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 35 mm 40 mm 75 mm 2 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 15 mm 35 mm
see page 2/217 2/218 2/219 2/221
SIMATIC PXI600
2/230 2/230
see page
SIMATIC PXI900
3 mm 0 6 mm 2/241
see page 2/240
2/136
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Cubical designs (mm) 5x5 8x8 12 x 32
2/141 2/146 2/150 2/150, 2/151 2/156 2/157, 2/159 2/158 2/160, 2/161 2/162, 2/163 2/164, 2/166 2/165, 2/166 2/167, 2/168 2/169 2/169
M18
18 mm
M30
30 mm
12 x 40
40 x 40
60 x 80
80 x 100
80 x 80
2/179 2/185, 2/186 2/186 2/1882/191 2/189 2/1922/194 2/193 2/195 2/1962/200 2/199 2/203 2/205 2/206 2/208 2/209 2/213 2/214 2/215 2/215 2/207 2/210 2/211 2/197, 2/198, 2/201 2/2022/204
2/212
2/220 2/222 2/223 2/224 2/225 2/226 2/227 2/227 2/228
2/231 2/231 2/232 2/232 2/233 2/233
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/137
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
I Overview
SIMATIC sensors PXI200

Sensors for standard applications. Typical values: Operating voltage up to 34 V DC Degree of protection up to IP67 Operating distance acc. to standard
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXI200
Design, Operating distance

0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.)
3 mm
0.6 mm
4 mm
0.8 mm
M5
0.8 mm
5 mm x 5 mm
0.8 mm
M8
6.5 mm
8 mm x 8 mm
M12
12 mm x 40 mm
12 mm x 32 mm
1 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm
1.5 mm 2.5 mm
1.5 mm
2 mm 4 mm
2 mm 4 mm
2 mm
Output
NO contact/NC contact pnp/npn
Number of wires Operating voltage

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
3, 4
/ /
4
Connection
/
2/141
/
2/146

from 2/148
/
2/150
IP65 / IP67
/
2/140
/
2/141
/
2/141
/
2/150
See page
from 2/142 from 2/144
2/138
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
2
SIMATIC PXI200
Design, Operating distance

1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI.5.)
Box with M14

2.5 mm 5 mm
M18
Button 18 mm
M30
40 mm x 40 mm
60 mm x 80 mm
80 mm x 100 mm
5 mm 8 mm
5 mm
10 mm 15 mm 15 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm
Output

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
4
/ /
4
Connection
M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment
/
2/153
/
2/158
IP65 / IP67
2/169
2/169
See page
from 2/157
from 2/162
from 2/165
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/139
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 0.6 mm
Class
Number of wires
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection
Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn
Standard duty 3-wire 3 mm, mini Flush 0.6 mm

V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 100 5000 0.01 10 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp
Circuit diagram number1) 11 }
Order No. 3 0.055 mm2
3RG46 032AB00
I Dimensions
Mounting instructions
Dimension depending on form A = active surface B = metal-free area
A
4,5
B 1,5
3RG46 032AB00
3 16
22
2/140
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00298
LED
NSD00302
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Class Number of wires Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn
Standard duty 3-wire 5 mm 5 mm, mini Flush 0.8 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 5000 0.01 10 Yellow LED IP67
Standard duty 3-wire 4 mm, mini Flush 0.8 mm

Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 5000 0.01 8 Yellow LED IP67
Standard duty 3-wire M5, mini Flush 0.8 mm

Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 }
Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 }
Order No. 3 0.14 mm2 } } } }
With 8 mm combination plug

2 3 4 A, C A A, C
3RG42 360AG00 3RG46 360GB00
3RG42 001AB00 3RG42 001AA00 3RG42 007AB00
3RG42 100AG00 3RG42 100AF00 3RG46 100GB00 3RG42 107AG00 3RG42 107AF00 3RG46 107GB00
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock
I Dimensions
A
3,3
B 2,4
A
B 2,4
3,3 A
B 2,4
NSD00304
3RG42 360AG00
5,5 5x5 1,5
3RG42 00 1AB00
4 18
3RG42 00 7AB00
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 3 5 2
3RG42 100..00 3RG42 107..00 3RG46 100..00 3RG46 107..00

M 5x0,5
2 3
F S 1 0 _ 0 0 1 6 1
NSD0_00306a
NSD0_0311a
1 8
2 3
25 3
14
25
25
3 8
18 20
LED
NSD00310
6 ,5
NSD00308
3 8
S W 6 ,5 8 x 1
NSD00307
M 1,6
SW 7 LED
M
8 x 1
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/141
1 8
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 1 mm
Standard duty 3-wire M8 Flush 1 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 10 } }
3RG40 110AG00 3RG40 110AF00 3RG40 110GB00 3RG40 117AG00 3RG40 117AF00 3RG40 113AG00 3RG40 113AF00 3RG40 113GB00
3RG40 110CC00 3RG40 117CC00 3RG40 113CC00

2 3 1 A, C A B }
NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp
With M12 connector

2 3 4 4 E, F F E, F F }
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
4 A 12
B 3
3RG40 110..00 3RG40 117..00 3RG40 113..00

M 8x1 34 SW 13
M 8x1 34 SW 13 4
M 8x1
50
52
NSD00314b
55
LED
NSD00319
LED
NSD00313
LED Sg
M 12x1
A = active surface B = metal-free area
2/142
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 13
34
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M8 Flush 1 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 15 ... 34 1.5 25 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact NO contact NO contact 7
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 15 } B A E, F B } B
With 8 mm combination plug With M12 connector

6
3RG40 110JB00 3RG40 117JB00 3RG40 113JB00
I Dimensions
4 A 12
B 3
3RG40 11 0JB00
M 8x1 34 SW 13
3RG40 11 7JB00
M 8x1 34 SW 13 4
3RG40 113JB00
M 8x1
NSD00314b
50
55
NSD00319
52
LED
LED
NSD00313
LED Sg
M 12x1
SW 13
34
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/143
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm, mini Flush 1.5 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 3000 0.02 10 Yellow LED IP67
Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm

Stainless steel 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67
Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm Flush 1.5 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 }
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 B

A A A A } }
3RG42 011AB00 3RG42 017AG00 3RG42 017AF00 3RG46 017GB00
3RG40 500AG33 3RG40 500AF33 3RG40 500GB33 3RG40 500GA33 3RG40 507AG33 3RG40 507AF33 3RG40 507GB33 3RG40 507GA33
B B
2/144
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
I Dimensions
4 A 13
3RG42 01, 3RG46 01-7
B 4,5
3RG42 01 1AB00
6,5 16
3RG42 017..00 3RG40 500..33 3RG40 507..33 3RG40 500..05 3RG40 507..05 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 3RG46 017..00
6,5
35
33
20
34
29
45
50
34 LED
NSD00336
NSD00328
LED
NSD00329
NSD00326
NSD00332
LED (4x) Sg
LED
LED
NSD00327
LED (4x) Sg
NSD00335
52
2
M 8x1
3RG40 50
4 A 12 B 3 A B
NSD00319
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/145
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire M8, mini Flush 1.5 mm
Standard duty 3-wire 8 mm, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm

Standard duty 3-wire 8 mm 8 mm Flush 1.5 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.07 10 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 }
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } B

A A A A } }
3RG42 110AG31 3RG42 117AG31 3RG42 117AF31 3RG46 117GB31
}
3RG42 370AB00 3RG42 370AA00 3RG46 370GG00 3RG42 377AB00 3RG42 377AA00 3RG46 377GG00
B B
} Preferred type, available from stock. 1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
4 A 12
3RG42 11, 3RG46 11, 3RG40 51
B 3
3RG42 11 0AG31 M 8x1
3RG42 117..31 3RG40 510..33 3RG40 517..33 3RG42 370..00, 3RG46 370..00 8 8 3 8x8 3RG46 117..31
SW 13
SW 13
35
45
33
16
40 37
29 17
NSD00351
NSD00319
LED
NSD00352
LED (4x) Sg
NSD00333a
NSD00338
LED
NSD00339b
LED Sg
M3 LED
3RG42 377..00, 3RG46 377..00

8x8
B
3
3RG42 37, 3RG46 37

10
M3
4 A 12
50 37
20
10
M 8x1
NSD00337
59
LED
Sg
NSD00334a
2/146
Siemens FS 10 2009
20
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire M8, Shorty Flush 1.5 mm
Standard duty 3-wire M8 Flush 1.5 mm


Stainless steel 10 ... 30 1.0 50 1500 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 13 14 10 } } B
3RG40 110AG05 3RG40 110AF05 3RG40 110GB05 3RG40 110GA05 3RG40 117AG05 3RG40 117AF05 3RG40 113AG05 3RG40 113AF05 3RG40 113GB05 3RG40 113GA05
3RG40 110CC05 3RG40 117CC05 3RG40 113CC05

2 3 4 5 1 A A A A F } } B B
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F
I Dimensions
4 A 12
B 3
3RG40 110..33 3RG40 117..33 3RG40 110..05 3RG40 117..05 3RG40 113..05
M 8x1 SW 13
M 8x1 SW 13
M 8x1 34 SW 13 4
M 8x1 34 SW 13
M 8x1
45 33
35
50
52
NSD0_00340a
NSD00319
LED
NSD0_00341c
LED (4x) Sg
NSD00314b
55
LED
LED
NSD00313
LED Sg
M 12x1
A = active surface; B = metal-free area
SW 13
34
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/147
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie V mA mA Hz mm ms
Standard duty 3-wire M12, Shorty Flush 2 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 12.A.33 3RG40 12.G.33
4-wire M12, Shorty Flush 2 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.0 50 800 0.1 3 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 120CD10 3RG40 123CD11
3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm

4-wire M12 Flush 2 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 120CD00 3RG40 123CD00
Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 10 } B } B
3RG40 120AG33 3RG40 120AF33 3RG40 120GB33 3RG40 120GA33

4 0.14 mm2
} B B } B B } B
3RG40 120AG01 3RG40 120AF01 3RG40 120GB00 3RG40 120GA00 3RG40 120CD00 3RG40 123AG01 3RG40 123AF01 3RG40 123GB00 3RG40 123CD00
4-wire 3-wire 4 0.14 mm2
3RG40 120CD10
3-wire E, F F E, F F F } B B
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268.

4-wire
} B } B } B
3RG40 123CD11
} B
I Dimensions
6 A 12
B 5
3RG40 120..33
M 12x1 4
3RG40 120CD10
M 12x1 4
3RG40 120..00 3RG40 120..01

M 12x1
3RG40 123..00 3RG40 123..01

M 12x1
35
40
SW 17
SW 17
4 59
NSD00361b
NSD00366
NSD00363
NSD00373
LED
3RG40 123..33
M 12x1
3RG40 123CD11
M 12x1
NSD00360a
SW 17
LED
LED
NSD00367b
SW 17 LED (4x) Sg
NSD00374
50
SW 17 LED Sg
2/148
Siemens FS 10 2009
29,5
B
45 34
SW 17
LED (4x) Sg
50
48
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Brass, nickel-plated V mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 700 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC Rated operational current Ie Continuous Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact NO contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 15 E, F } B } B
With M12 connector
3RG40 120JB00 3RG40 123JB00
I Dimensions
6 A
12 B 5
3RG40 120JB00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 123JB00
M 12x1
4 59
NSD00363
SW 17
A
NSD00360a
NSD00361b
LED
SW 17
LED (4x) Sg
50
48
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/149
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Flush 2 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 50 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 1.0 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 10
3RG40 700AG45
A F
3RG40 707CD45
3RG40 710CD00

2 1
NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp
3RG40 707AG45
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock
I Dimensions
B A
6 5
3RG40 700..45
LED 3,2x5 26 18 6 4 Sensor center 12 10 M3 32 40
3RG40 710CD00
27 12,6 8 2,4 13
16
NSD00378
3,2
32
2,6
NSD00376b
NSD00382
3RG40 707..45
LED 3,2x5 26 18 6 Sensor center 4 M3 32 40 12 10 16
A = active surface B = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.
3,2
NSD0 00377b
2/150
Siemens FS 10 2009
4
M 8x 1
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit diagram number1) 11 12 10
Connector type2)
3RG40 700AG01 3RG40 700AF01

A B
3RG40 700CD00 3RG40 707CD01 3RG40 707CD02 3RG40 703CD00
NO contact, pnp 2 NO contact and 1 NC contact, pnp; LED corresp. to NO contact 1 NO contact and NC contact, pnp; LED corresp. to NC contact
3RG40 707AG01 3RG40 703AG01 3RG40 703AF01
With M12 connector

2 3 1
E, F F F
I Dimensions
B A
6 5
3RG40 700..00, 3RG40 700..01

4 4 40 32 Sensor center 12
3RG40 703..00, 3RG40 703..01

Sensor center 4
NSD00379b
40 32
12
17
26
3,2
NSD00378
36
6,5 LED
6,5
17
26
3,2
Sg
LED
3RG40 707..01, 3RG40 707..02

B
Sensor center 4 4 40 32 12 10
Sg
NSD00380
LED
6,5
34 26
17
These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.
3,2
NSD00381
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/151
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire 6.5 mm Not flush 2.5 mm
Standard duty 3-wire M8 Not flush 2.5 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 B B B A A A A B B
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 B
B B
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
10 A 6 20
B 8
3RG40 600..33
6,5
3RG40 607..33
6,5
3RG40 210..33
M 8x1 SW 13
3RG40 217..33
M 8x1
45
NSD00386
NSD00388
LED
LED
NSD00389a
NSD00391
LED (4x) Sg
NSD00387
2/152
Siemens FS 10 2009
4 SW 13
LED (4x)
Sg
35 4
35 4
33
45 33
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 13 14 10 B } B
3RG40 720GB00 3RG40 720GA00 3RG40 723GB00 3RG40 723GA00
} B
3RG40 720CD00 3RG40 723CD00
With M12 connector

4 5 1 E, F F F B B
NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
} B
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
B A
7 6
3RG40 720..00
M 14x1
3RG40 723..00
M 14x1
Plan view:
NSD00400
20
23
20
23
NSD00402a
6x3,5 3,5
56
27
20 5,5
NSD00398a
NSD00399a
5,5 LED
LED
Sg
66
6x3,5 3,5
20
56
12
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/153
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm
Molded plastic V mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 800 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 15 E, F B B
With M12 connector
3RG40 720JB00 3RG40 723JB00
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
B A
7 6
3RG40 720..00
M 14x1
23
20
20 5,5
NSD00398a
NSD00402a
6x3,5 3,5
LED
2/154
Siemens FS 10 2009
56
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie V mA mA Hz mm ms
Standard duty 3-wire M12, Shorty Not flush 4 mm

4-wire M12, Shorty Not flush 4 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.0 50 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 220CD10 3RG40 223CD11
3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm

4-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 220CD00 3RG40 223CD00
Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit diagram Connector number1) type2) 11 12 13 14 10 } B B
Order No.

4 0.14 mm2
} B } B } B B } B
3RG40 220AG01 3RG40 220AF01 3RG40 220GB00 3RG40 220GA00 3RG40 220CD00 3RG40 223AG01 3RG40 223AF01 3RG40 223GB00 3RG40 223GA00 3RG40 223CD00
4-wire 3-wire 4 0.14 mm2
3 0.25 mm2
3RG40 220CD10
3-wire E, F F E, F F F } B B
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1

4-wire
} B } B } B B B
3RG40 223CD11
I Dimensions
15 A 9
27 B 8
3RG40 220..33
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 220CD10
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 220..00 3RG40 220..01

M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 223..00 3RG40 223..01

M 12x1 6,5
35
40
4 65
NSD0_00421a
SW 17
SW 17
56
NSD0_00427a
NSD0_00444a
NSD00423
NSD0_00420a
LED
LED
SW 17
3RG40 223..33
B
M 12x1 4 SW 17 34
3RG40 223CD11
M 12x1
LED
LED (4x) Sg
50 6,5
NSD00428
LED (4x) Sg
NSD0_00448c
LED (4x) Sg
SW 17 39
45 6,5
SW 17
Siemens FS 10 2009
54
2/155
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire Cubic 12 mm 40 mm Not flush 4 mm
Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 1.5 (24 V) 25 2 300 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NO contact NO contact, pnp NO contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 15 2

A E, F 6
3RG40 800AG45 3RG40 807AG45

} B
3RG40 220JB00 3RG40 223JB00
} B
B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
I Dimensions
15 A 9 27
3RG40 80-.AG45
B 8
3RG40 800AG45
LED 3,2x5 26 18 6 4 Sensor center 12 10 M3 32 40
3RG40 220JB00
M 12x1 6,5
16
NSD01073
NSD00376b
NSD0_00420a
3RG40 807AG45
B
LED
LED 3,2x5
26 18 6
Sensor center 4 M3 32 40 12 10
3RG40 223JB00
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 22-.JB00
15 A 9 27 B
3,2
16
4 65
NSD0_00421a
SW 17 LED (4x) Sg SW 17 54
3,2
NSD0 00377b
NSD00423
2/156
Siemens FS 10 2009
56
M 8x 1
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
V mA mA Hz mm ms

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 800 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67



Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 13 14 10 } B B B B
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } B B } B
} B
3RG40 130CD00 3RG40 133CD00
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F } B B B B
} B B B B
} B
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
I Dimensions
11 A 30
B
10
3RG40 130..33 3RG40 133..33 3RG40 130..00 3RG40 133..00 3RG40 130..01 3RG40 133..01 M 18x1 M 18x1
4
45 31 4
M 18x1
SW 24 34
M 18x1 4
35
SW 24
NSD0_00456b
NSD00446b
NSD00447
LED
M 12x1
SW 24
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
NSD00451
69 55
LED (4x)
54
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/157
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty 3-wire 18 mm (button) Flush 5 mm (3,2 mm)
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 10 ... 30 1.5 50 100 0.15 1.0 IP67
Standard duty 4-wire M14 Not flush 5 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 10
Order No.
} B
3RG40 820CD00 3RG40 823CD00
With M12 connector

1
3 0.25 mm2 } }
With single wires, 0.5 m, PVC

11 12 13
3RG40 750AJ00 3RG40 750AH00 3RG40 750GJ00

I Dimensions
3RG40 82
20 A 12 40
B 15
3RG40 75
18 15,95 9,9 3,85
3RG40 820..00
M 14x1
3RG40 823..00
M 14x1
Plan view:
NSD00400
20
23
23
20
NSD00464
NSD00475a
5,5
NSD00398a
NSD00399a
5,5 LED
15 30 B 10 A
LED
Sg
3RG40 750GJ00 also possible with non-embedding mounting: Rated operating distance sn = 3,2 mm
2/158
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD 00467
66
6x3,5 3,5
56
27
12
20
6x3,5 3,5
20
56
12
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) DC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC Rated operational current Ie Continuous Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 15 E, F } B } B
With M12 connector
3RG40 130JB00 3RG40 133JB00
I Dimensions
11 A 30
B 10
3RG40 130JB00
M 18x1
3RG40 133JB00
M 18x1 4
NSD00451
54
SW 24
NSD00446b
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
69 55
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/159
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
V mA mA Hz mm ms Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 500 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67



Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 10 B B B B
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } B B B B
3RG40 230AG01 3RG40 230AF01 3RG40 230GB00 3RG40 230GA00 3RG40 233AG01 3RG40 233AF01 3RG40 233GB00
} B
3RG40 230CD00 3RG40 233CD00
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F B B B B
} B B B
I Dimensions
20 A 11 28
B
15
3RG40 230..33
M 18x1 4
3RG40 233..33
M 18x1
3RG40 230..00 3RG40 230..01

M 18x1
3RG40 233..00 3RG40 233..01

M 18x1 4
45 31 10,5
35 10,5
SW 24 34
15
54 10,5
69 55 10,5
NSD00500
NSD0_00502a
NSD0_00503b
LED
M 12x1
NSD00493
SW 24
LED (4x)
LED
NSD00494b
M 12x1
2/160
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
SW 24
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Brass, nickel-plated V mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 200 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP67 3RG40 23.JB00
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC Rated operational current Ie Continuous Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 15 E, F } B } B
With M12 connector
3RG40 230JB00 3RG40 233JB00
I Dimensions
20 A 11 28
B 15
3RG40 220..00 3RG40 223..00

M 18x1
M 18x1 4
15
54 10,5
69 55 10,5
NSD00500
NSD00493
LED
NSD00494b
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
SW 24
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/161
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200



Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } B } B } B B
3RG40 140AG01 3RG40 140AF01 3RG40 140GB00 3RG40 140GA00 3RG40 143AG01 3RG40 143AF01 3RG40 143GB00
} B
3RG40 140CD00 3RG40 143CD00
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F } B B B B
} B B B
I Dimensions
25 37
3RG40 14...33
B 16
3RG40 14 0..33
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143..33 3RG40 140..00 3RG40 143..00 3RG40 140..01 3RG40 143..01 M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5
M 30x1,5
45 31
35
NSD00521
SW 36
NSD0_00523b
NSD0_00524b
SW 36
LED (4x)
M 12x1
NSD00518a
NSD00519
LED (4x) Sg
LED
LED
2/162
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 36 58,5
69 55
54
SW 36 34
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 15 200 300 0.3 40 IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 15 10 } B
3RG40 140JB00 3RG40 143JB00
} B
3RG40 140CD00 3RG40 143CD00
With M12 connector

6 1 E, F F B
I Dimensions
25 37
B 16
3RG40 140JB00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143JB00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143CD00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 140CD00
M 30x1,5 5
SW 36 58,5
SW 36
NSD00521
SW 36
NSD00519
NSD00518a
LED
LED (4x) Sg
NSD00518a
NSD00519
LED (4x) Sg
LED
SW 36 58,5
69 55
54
69 55
54
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/163
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200



Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

} B
3RG40 240CD00 3RG40 243CD00
With M12 connector

2 3 4 5 1 E, F F E, F F F B B B B
} B B B
3RG40 243AG01 3RG40 243AF01 3RG40 243GB00
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
B 25
3RG40 24 0..33
M 30x1,5 SW 36 16
3RG40 243..33
M 30x1,5 31 16 5
3RG40 240..00 3RG40 240..01

M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 243..00 3RG40 243..01

M 30x1,5
16
15
35
45
35
5
LED (4x) M 12x1
69
NSD00548
NSD0_00551a
LED
NSD0_00552b
M 12x1
NSD0_00544b
SW 36
SW 36 LED (4x)
NSD00545b
LED
2/164
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 36
58,5
54
55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

Enclosure material Operating voltage No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector, rotatable

NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn 1 F F
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.

} }

} B
} B B
3RG40 383CD00 3RG40 383GD00
With terminal box

19 20 21 18
3RG40 316AG01 3RG40 316AF01 3RG40 316GB00
3RG40 316CD00
I Dimensions
25 A 75
B 30
3RG40 316..0.
4 0
4 0 4 5
3RG40 383..00
4 0
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163
5 ,3
NSD 01164
1 2 0
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3 3 0 1 4
6 0
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
M 2 0 1 ,5
30 40
5,3x7,3
M 12x1 40
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector..
69
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/165
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP65

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 15 E, F } B B
Order No.
With M12 connector With terminal box
3RG40 240JB00 3RG40 243JB00

}

0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
6 22
NO contact
3RG40 316JB00
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
3RG40 240..00 3RG40 243..00
B
3RG40 240..00
M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 243..00
M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 316JB00
25 A
58,5
3RG40 316JB00
40 40
40
75
B 30
45
25
54
15
69
120
55
5,3
60
SW 36
SW 36
LED YE 7,3 5,3 14
NSD00548
NSD0_00544b
LED
NSD00545b
LED (4x)
30
B
M 201,5
M 12x1
2/166
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00560a
NSD 01164
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200


Switching output
With terminal box

Circuit diagram number1) 19 20 21 18 }
Order No.
Order No.
3RG40 416AG01 3RG40 416AF01 3RG40 416GB00
} B
3RG40 416CD00
I Dimensions
70 A 50 100
B 40
3RG40 416..0.
4 0
4 5 4 0
4 0
40
5 ,3
1 2 0
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3 3 0 1 4
NSD00583
6 0
M 2 0 1 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/167
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Standard duty (PLC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm
Molded plastic V mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 1.5 25 2 75 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP65
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC Rated operational current Ie Continuous Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 416JB00
I Dimensions
70 A 50 100
B 40
3RG40 416JB00
40
45 40
40
40
120
5,3
60
NSD00583
LED YE 7,3 5,3 14
30
M 201,5
2/168
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00560a
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI200
Operating distance 30 mm Operating distance 40 mm
Molded plastic V mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 50 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 1.0 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65

Enclosure material Operating voltage DC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC Rated operational current Ie Continuous Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

Circuit diagram number1) 18 B
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 B
3RG40 426CD00
3RG40 436CD00
1) See page 2/242. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
I Dimensions
90 A 60 210
3RG40 426CD00
B 90
3RG40 426CD00
6 0 4 5 L E D Y E L E D G N M 2 0 x 1 ,5
3RG40 436CD00
80,3 65 27,5 LED YE LED GN Pg 13,5
NSD00625
40
7 7
2 4 ,5
NSD00608
5 ,3 4 1
N S D 0
100 65
0 0 6 0 1 a
4 5
5,3 41,5
3RG40 436CD00
80 A 15 160 B 90
NSD00613
40
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/169
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
I Overview

Sensors for applications with special requirements: Increased operating voltages Higher degrees of protection Operating distances better than specified in standard
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXI300
Type, Operating distance

0 ... 0.8 mm (PXI.1.) 1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.)
4 mm
0.6 mm
M5
0.6 mm
M8
M12
Box with M14
6.5 mm
8 mm x 8 mm
M18
1 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 6 mm
2 mm 4 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm 3 mm
3 mm
5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI.4.)
6 mm 10 mm
5 mm
5 mm 8 mm 12 mm 20 mm
Output

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3
/ /
2, 3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3
/ /
Connection
/ /
/
2/176, 2/184
/ /
/
2/179
IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K
/ /
See page
2/172
2/172
from 2/172 from 2/173
from 2/178
from 2/185
2/170
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
2
SIMATIC PXI300

5 ... 10 mm (PXI33.) 12 ... 22 mm (PXI34.) 25 ... 40 mm (PXI35.)
18 mm
5 mm 8 mm
M30
10 mm 15 mm 22 mm 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
60 mm x 80 mm
80 mm x 100 mm
15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm 30 mm 30 mm 40 mm
50 ... 75 mm (PXI36.)
50 mm
65 mm
Output

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 265/320 V AC/DC
/ /
3
/ /
2, 3
/ /
2, 3, 4
/ /
2, 3
/ /
2, 3
Connection
M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment
/ /
/ /
IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K
/
from 2/207
/
from 2/211
See page
from 2/186
from 2/192
from 2/197
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/171
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 0.6 mm Operating distance 1 mm
IP68 3-wire 4 mm, mini Flush 0.6 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 3000 0.01 8 IP68
IP68 3-wire M5, mini Flush 0.6 mm

Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 3000 0.01 8 IP68
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M8 Flush 1 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 2 3 2 3 }

A A E, F F
3RG46 000AG02
3RG46 100AG02
3RG40 110AB00 3RG40 110AA00 3RG40 117AB00 3RG40 117AA00 3RG40 113AB00 3RG40 113AA00
NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. } Preferred type, available from stock.
I Dimensions
A
B 2,4
2 A
B
2,4
4 A
12
B 3
NSD0_00305
NSD00304
3RG46 000AG02
4
3RG46 100AG02
M 5x0,5
20 SW 7
3RG40 11 0A.00
M 8x1
3RG40 11 7A.00
M 8x1 4 41 SW 13
NSD00319
3RG40 11 3A.00
M 8x1 41 SW 13 LED Sg
SW 13 41
25
25
57
58
NSD00300
NSD00299
NSD0_00320a
LED
NSD0_00321a
LED Sg
NSD00322
2/172
Siemens FS 10 2009
62
38
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
I Technical specification
Brass, nickel-plated V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 10 300 4000 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Flush 2 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1800 5 25/1200 (AC/DC) 0.04 100 Yellow LED IP67
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 } B }
With M12 connector
17 2 3 E, F F E, F F } B
3RG40 120AB00 3RG40 120AA00 3RG40 123AB00 3RG40 123AA00
} B B
3RG40 120KB00 3RG40 120KA00 3RG40 123KB00 3RG40 123KA00
8 9
} B B
I Dimensions
6 A 12
B 6
3RG40 120A.00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 123A.00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 120K.00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 123K.00
M 12x1 4
NSD00365
SW 17 54
SW 17
SW 17
NSD00368
NSD00364
LED
NSD00364
NSD00365
LED (4x) Sg
LED
LED (4x) Sg
SW 17 54
56
65
56
65
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/173
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 12 mm Flush 2 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K
IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

Brass, nickel-plated 15 ... 34 17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 1200 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

Switching output
With M12 connector

NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 2 11 12 13 14 E, F B B B B
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
With 2 m cable
PUR, 3 0.25 mm2
PUR, 3 0.25 mm2 B B B B
B B B
3RG40 123AG31
PVC, 3 0.25 mm2
3RG40 120AG31 3RG40 120GB31
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. B: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99.
I Dimensions
6 A 12
B 5
3RG40 520..30
12
3RG40 120..30
M 12x1
3RG40 12 0..31
M 12x1
3RG40 12 3..31
M 12x1
50
50
4 59
NSD00361b
SW 17
NSD00363
50
NSD00372
NSD00360a
LED
NSD00360a
LED
SW 17
LED
2/174
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 17 LED (4x) Sg
48
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M8, Shorty Flush 2 mm
Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M8 Flush 2 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 2 2 } B B
Order No. 3 m, 3 0.25 mm2 }

A A A A E, F E, F B } B B B
3RG41 110AG00
With M12 connector
NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp
3RG41 113AG00
I Dimensions
4 A 15
B 4
3RG41 110..33
M 8x1 SW 13
3RG41 117..33
M 8x1 SW 13
3RG41 110..00
M 8x1 34 SW 13
3RG41 113..00
M 8x1
45 33
50
NSD00314b
NSD0_00340a
NSD00356
LED
NSD0_00341c
LED (4x) Sg
55
LED
LED
M 12x1
SW 13
35
34
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/175
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 10 300 800 0.05 40 Yellow LED IP67
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M14 Flush 2.5 mm

Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1200 5 25/1000 (AC/DC) 0.04 100 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number } B B
With M12 connector
11 12 16 17 E, F E, F F
3RG40 720AB00 3RG40 720AA00 3RG40 723AB00
B B
NO contact, pnp NO contact NC contact
2 8 9
} B
B B
I Dimensions
B A
7 6
3RG40 723..00
M 14x1
Plan view
NSD00400
3RG40 72-0..00
M 14x1
20
12
23
27
6x3,5 3,5 20 5,5
NSD00398a
56
23
20 LED 56
NSD00402a
NSD00399a
5,5 LED
Sg
2/176
Siemens FS 10 2009
66
6x3,5 3,5
20
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance (IP68) 3-wire 6.5 mm Flush 2.5 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.15 50 IP68
Increased operating distance (IP68) 3-wire M8 Flush 2.5 mm

Stainless steel 10 ... 30 10 200 1000 0.15 50 IP68

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp
3RG46 020AG02
3RG46 110AG02
I Dimensions
3RG46 02
6 A 16 B 9
3RG46 11
8 A 16 B 9 A B
X 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal
3RG46 020AG02
6,5
NSD01191
3RG46 110AG02
M 8x1 SW 13
45
45
NSD00393
NSD00392
NSD00395
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/177
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 3-wire 6.5 mm Almost flush 3 mm
Increased operating distance 3-wire M8 Almost flush 3 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 13 } B

2 A E, F F E, F } B 2 3 4
3RG43 020AG01 3RG43 027AG01
} B B } B } B B B
3RG43 110AG01 3RG43 110GB01 3RG43 117AG01 3RG43 113AG01 3RG43 113AF01 3RG43 113GB01
I Dimensions
A
10
13
B 9
A
16
B 9
NSD00397
3RG43 020AG01
6,5
3RG43 027AG01
6,5
3RG43 110..01 3RG43 117..01 3RG43 113..01

M 8x1 M 8x1 33 SW 13 M 8x1 SW 13 33 66 LED
NSD00405
33
33
45
33
45
SW 13
60
53
NSD00395
X
LED 7 Sg
NSD00403
NSD00407
LED
NSD00406
LED
LED
Sg M 12x1
Sg
NSD00404
2/178
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 3-wire 8 mm 8 mm Almost flush 3 mm

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 13 } B

2 4 A A } B B
3RG43 370AG01 3RG43 370GB01 3RG43 377AG01 3RG43 377GB01
I Dimensions
12 A 16
B 9
3RG43 370..01
8x8
5
3RG43 377..01
3
10
8x8
40 37
20
50 37
M3
NSD00333a
59
NSD00412
LED
LED
Sg
NSD00334a
M3
X 2,4 mm when mounted in steel, X 1,2 mm when mounted in other metal
20
10
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/179
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number } B
With M12 connector
11 12 16 17 E, F F E, F F
} B B
2 3 8 9
} B
} B B
I Dimensions
15 A 9 27
B 8
3RG40 220A.00
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 223A.00
M 12x1
3RG40 220K.00
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 223K.00
M 12x1
6,5
6,5
60
4 SW 17
LED (4x) Sg
71
62
SW 17
SW 17
62
NSD00423
NSD0_00424a
LED
NSD0_00424a
NSD00425a
LED (4x) Sg
SW 17
LED
2/180
Siemens FS 10 2009
71
NSD00425a
60
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K 3-wire 12 mm Not flush 4 mm
IP68 / 69 K 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm



Switching output
With 2 m cable
Order No. PUR, 3 0.25 mm2
Order No. PUR, 3 0.25 mm2 B B B B
Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2 B B
With M12 connector
3RG40 220AG31 3RG40 220GB31 3RG40 223AG31
NO contact, pnp
I Dimensions
15 A 9
27 B 8
3RG40 620..30
12
3RG40 220..30
M 12x1
3RG40 220..31 3RG40 223..31

M 12x1 6,5
6,5 M 12x1
4 65
NSD0_00421a
50
50
56
SW 17
NSD00423
SW 17
NSD00372
NSD00360a
LED
LED
NSD0_00420a
LED (4x) Sg
LED
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/181
SW 17
54
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 10 300 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K
IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm

Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 200 1200 5 25/900 (AC/DC) 0.12 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 E, F } B
With M12 connector
17 2 8 E, F E, F B
3RG40 220AB30 3RG40 220AA30 3RG40 223AB30
3RG40 220KB30 3RG40 223KA30 3RG40 223KB30
NO contact, pnp NO contact
I Dimensions
15 A 9 27
B 8
3RG40 220..30
M 12x1 4
3RG40 223..30
M 12x1 4
NSD00365
SW 17
NSD00423
NSD00364
LED
LED (4x) Sg
2/182
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 17 54
56
65
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 3-wire M12, Shorty Flush 4 mm
Increased operating distance 3-wire M12 Flush 4 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 2 3 E, F F } B B
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } B B } B B
With M12 connector
3RG41 120AG33 3RG41 123AG33 3RG41 123AF33
3RG41 120AG01 3RG41 120AF01 3RG41 123AG01 3RG41 123AF01
I Dimensions
16 A 14
B 8
3RG41 12 0AG33
M 12x1 4
3RG41 123..33
M 12x1 4
3RG41 12 0A.01
M 12x1
3RG41 12 3A.01
M 12x1
35
45
34
4 59
NSD00361b
NSD00440
SW 17
NSD00366
NSD00367b
LED
SW 17 LED (4x) Sg
SW 17
NSD00360a
LED
SW 17
LED (4x) Sg
50
48
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/183
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 10 ... 65 10 300 300 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP67

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 13 4 E, F } B } B
With M12 connector
3RG40 820AB00 3RG40 823AB00
NO contact, pnp
I Dimensions
3RG40 82
20 A 12 40
B 15
3RG40 823..00
M 14x1
Plan view:
NSD00400
23
20
27
12
NSD00475a
NSD00399a
5,5 LED
Sg
2/184
Siemens FS 10 2009
66
6x3,5 3,5
20
56
12
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Brass, nickel-plated V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 10 300 800 (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 0.15 40 Yellow LED IP67


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 } B } B
With M12 connector
17 2 3 E, F F E, F F } B B
} } B
8 9
} B B
I Dimensions
11 A 30
B 10
3RG40 130..00 3RG40 130..01

M 18x1
3RG40 133..00 3RG40 133..01

M 18x1 4
NSD00451
54
NSD00446b
SW 24
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
69 55
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/185
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300



Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

With M12 connector
3RG40 130AG31 3RG40 130GB31 3RG40 133AG31
NO contact, pnp
I Dimensions
11 A 30
B 10
3RG40 530..30
8
3RG40 130..30
M 18x1
3RG40 130..31 3RG40 13 3AG31 M 18x1

M 18x1 4
54
54
54
NSD00451
SW 24
SW 24
NSD00459
NSD00446b
LED
NSD00445
LED
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
2/186
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
69 55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 3-wire M8 Not flush 6 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit diagram number1) 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5
Connector type2)

A A A A E, F F E, F F
3RG43 210AG01 3RG43 210AF01 3RG43 210GB01 3RG43 210GA01 3RG43 217AG01 3RG43 217AF01 3RG43 217GB01 3RG43 217GA01 3RG43 213AG01 3RG43 213AF01 3RG43 213GB01 3RG43 213GA01
} B B
3RG43 120AG01 3RG43 120AF01 3RG43 120GB01
NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, npn NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact, npn NC contact, pnp
With M12 connector
} B B B B } B B B B
2 3 4 5
} B B
3RG43 123AG01 3RG43 123AF01 3RG43 123GB01

I Dimensions
A 16
20
40
B 18
A
12
24
B 18
X 2.4 mm for mounting in steel, X 1.2 mm for mounting in other metals
NSD00483
3RG43 210..01 3RG43 217..01 3RG43 213..01 3RG43 120..01 3RG43 123..01
M 8x1 4
NSD00484
M 8x1 4 SW 13
4
M 8x1 SW 13 29
M 12x1
M 12x1
29 SW 13
X
SW 17 37
4
LED Sg
NSD00481a
60
62
LED
NSD00477
NSD00479b
LED 6 8,5
LED
NSD00480a
LED
Sg
NSD00478a
M 12x1
22
Sg
SW 17 37
29
41,5
41
50
60
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/187
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 } B } B
With M12 connector
17 2 3 E, F F E, F F } B B
} B B
8 9
} B B
I Dimensions
20 A 11 28
B 15
3RG40 230..00 3RG40 230..01

M 18x1
3RG40 233..00 3RG40 233..01

M 18x1
4
15
69 55 10,5
54 10,5
NSD00500
SW 24
NSD00493
LED
NSD00494b
M 12x1
2/188
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24 58,5
LED (4x)
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300



Switching output
With 2 m cable
With M12 connector
3RG40 230AG31 3RG40 230GB31 3RG40 233AG31
NO contact, pnp
I Dimensions
20 A 11 50
B 15
3RG40 630..30
8
3RG40 230..30
M 18x1
3RG40 230..31 3RG40 233..31

M 18x1
M 18x1
15
54
54 10,5
69 55 10,5
SW 24
NSD00459
NSD00501
SW 24
NSD00493
LED
NSD00445
LED
LED
NSD00494b
M 12x1
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/189
SW 24 58,5
LED (4x)
54
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire M18 Not flush 8 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 B B
With M12 connector
17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F B B
} B B
I Dimensions
20 A 11 50
B 15
3RG40 230..30
M 18x1
3RG40 233..30
M 18x1 4
15
NSD00501
SW 24
NSD00446b
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
2/190
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
69 55
54
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 3-wire M18, Shorty Flush 8 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 11 2 E, F B B
Order No.
With 3 m cable, PUR With M12 connector
3RG41 130AG33 3RG41 133AG33

B } B
3 0.25 mm2
NO contact, pnp
3RG41 130AG01 3RG41 133AG01
NO contact, pnp
I Dimensions
20 A 30
B 3 20
3RG41 130..33 3RG41 133..33

M 18x1 4
3RG41 130..01 3RG41 133..01

M 18x1
M 18x1 4
M 18x1 4
45 31
SW 24 34
35
SW 24
NSD01071
SW 24
70
NSD00447
NSD01067
NSD0_00456b
LED (4x)
NSD0_01069a
LED
LED Sg M 12x1
M 12x1
LED
SW 24 52
50
70
50
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/191
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number } B B
With M12 connector
11 12 16 17 E, F F E, F F
} B } B
2 3 8 9
} B B
} B B
I Dimensions
25 37
B 16 A
3RG40 14 0..00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143..00
M 30x1,5 5
NSD00521
A
NSD00518a
SW 36
NSD00519
LED
LED (4x) Sg
2/192
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 36 58,5
69 55
54
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With 2 m cable
Circuit diagram number1) 11 12 13 14 B B B B
I Dimensions
25 A 45
B
3RG40 540..30
30
3RG40 140..30
M 30x1,5 5
16
54
54
NSD0_00525a
LED
NSD00518a
NSD00522
LED
SW 36
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/193
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Brass, nickel-plated V V mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34
IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire M30 Flush 10 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 25/200 (AC/DC) 0.3 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V/34 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection
17 (24 V); 30 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 0.3 40 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K

Switching output
With 2 m cable
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact NC contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 13 16 17 8 9 E, F F B B
Order No. PVC, 3 0.25 mm2
With M12 connector
3RG40 140AG31 3RG40 140GB31
B B B B
NO contact NC contact
I Dimensions
25 A 45
B
3RG40 140..31
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 140..31
M 30x1,5 5
NSD00519
16
54
NSD00522
SW 36
2/194
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00518a
LED
LED (4x) Sg
SW 36 58,5
69 55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit diagram Connector number1) type2) 11 13 E, F F E, F } B
With M12 connector
3RG43 220AG01 3RG43 223AG01 3RG43 223AF01
3RG46 131AB01 3RG46 130GB00 3RG46 133AB01 3RG46 133GB01
2 3 4
} B B
I Dimensions
3RG43 22
18 A 12 36
B 30
3RG43 220AG01
M 12x1 4
3RG43 223..01
M 12x1 4
3RG46 131AB01 3RG46 133AB01 3RG46 130GB00 3RG46 133GB01

M 18x1
M 18x1
50 5,7
SW 17 37
5,7
SW 24 34
SW 17 37
10
60
50
NSD0_00513a
LED
LED
NSD0_00514a
63,5
40
NSD00517
LED
NSD00537
LED
Sg
NSD00538
Sg
3RG46 13
14 A 36 B 4 36
NSD00543
SW 24 34
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/195
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 12 16 B B
With M12 connector
17 2 3 E, F F E, F F } B B
} B } B
8 9
} B B
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
B
25
3RG40 24 0..00
M 30x1,5
3RG40 243..00
M 30x1,5 16
15
16
5 LED (4x) M 12x1 SW 36 58,5
54
NSD0_00544b
SW 36
NSD00545b
NSD00548
LED
2/196
Siemens FS 10 2009
69
55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 20 300 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm

Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable
Circuit diagram number1) 23 } B
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 316AD00
} B
24
3RG40 316KD00
I Dimensions
25 A 75
B 30
3RG40 316AD00
4 0
4 5 4 0
3RG40 316KD00
4 0
45
40
40
40
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
60
6 0
NSD 01164
A
3 0
LED YE 7,3 5,3 14
1 4
M 2 0 1 ,5
30
M 201,5
NSD0_00560a
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3
120
5 ,3
1 2 0
5,3
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/197
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm mm ms 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.5 2.0 300 2 25/50 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.04 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED IP67

Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 3 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 2 E, F B
Order No.
With M12 connector
3RG40 383KB00
B B
3RG41 140AG01 3RG41 143AG01
NO contact, pnp NO contact
With M12 connector, rotatable

8
E, F
I Dimensions
25 A 75
B 30
3RG40 383..00
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163
3RG41 140AG01
M 30x1,5
3RG41 143AG01
M 30x1,5
69
50
50
NSD 01164
30 40
5,3x7,3
NSD00554
M 12x1 40
LED
LED
NSD00555
Sg
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector..
2/198
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 36 52
SW 36
70
70
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300



Switching output
With 2 m cable
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 8 9 E, F F B B B B
Order No. PUR, 3 0.25 mm2 B B B B B B
With M12 connector
3RG40 240AG30 3RG40 240AF30 3RG40 240GB30 3RG40 240GA30 3RG40 243AG30 3RG40 243AF30
3RG40 240AG31 3RG40 240GB31 3RG40 243AG31
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
B 25
3RG40 640..30
30
3RG40 240..30
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 243..30
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 240..31
M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 243..31
M 30x1,5 16
15
54
54
5 LED (4x) M 12x1
SW 36 58,5
69 55
54
SW 36
69
NSD00548
NSD0_00525a
NSD00518a
LED
NSD00519
NSD0_00544b
LED
LED (4x) Sg
SW 36
NSD00545b
LED
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/199
SW 36
58,5
55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) 3-wire M30 Not flush 15 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number B B
With M12 connector
11 12 16 17 2 3 8 9 E, F F E, F F
} B B
B B
B B
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
B 25
3RG40 240..30
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 243..30
M 30x1,5 5
NSD00519
15
54
NSD00548
2/200
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00518a
LED
LED (4x) Sg
SW 36 58,5
SW 36
69 55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
IP68 / 69 K 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 15 ... 34 25 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K
IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm

Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 100 0.75 100 Yellow LED IP68 / 69 K
IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR Sensor in longitudinal axis

NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact NC contact 11 12 10 16 17
Circuit diagram number1)
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 B B
3RG40 300CD00
3RG40 300AB00 3RG40 300AA00

B B
3RG40 300KB00 3RG40 300KA00

B B
Sensor 90 to longitudinal axis

11 10 16 17 B
3RG40 300CD01
3RG40 300AB01
3RG40 300KB01 3RG40 300KA01
I Dimensions
25 A 75
B 30
3RG40 300..0.
40 45,5 40
30
5,3
35
NSD 01164
111,5
7,3x5,3
B
28
NSD00561
LED YE
60
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/201
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 20 mm


Switching output
With terminal box

Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 416AD00
} B
24
3RG40 416KD00
I Dimensions
70 A 50 100
B 40
3RG40 416AD00
4 0
4 5 4 0
3RG40 416KD00
4 0
45
40
40
40
40
NSD00583
LED YE 7,3 5,3 14
3 0
1 4
M 2 0 1 ,5
30
M 201,5
2/202
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00560a
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3
120
5 ,3
1 2 0 6 0
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
5,3
60
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm

Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact and NC contact, pnp
Circuit diagram number1) 11 13 2 4 18
Connector type2) }
Order No.
With M12 connector With terminal box

B
E, F E, F
0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG41 346CD01
I Dimensions
3RG46 23
36 A 100
B 80
3RG46 230..02
M 18x1 10
3RG46 233..02
M 18x1
10 SW 24 34
3RG41 346CD01
40
45 40
40
SW 24 34
20
63,5 40
118
50
5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,35,3 30 14

60
NSD0_00570a
LED
NSD00574a
LED
NSD00571
NSD00572
Sg
M 201,5
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.
3RG41 34
40 A 80 B 60
NSD01074
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/203
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm mm ms 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 0.75 0.05 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67
Increased operating distance (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 20 mm

Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.5 2.0 200 <2 25/30 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.05 ... 3.3 100 Yellow LED IP67
Enclosure material Operating voltage DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn NO contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 1 8 F F F } B B
Order No.
Order No.
3RG41 383CD00 3RG41 383GD00

B
3RG41 383KB00
I Dimensions
30 A 80
B 40
3RG41 383..00
LED 40 46 55
NSD 01163
NSD 01165
A
30 40
5,3x7,3
M 12x1 40
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.
2/204
Siemens FS 10 2009
69
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 13 2 4 E, F E, F } }
With M12 connector
I Dimensions
37 A 80
B 6 66
3RG46 140..00
M 30x1,5
3RG46 143..00
M 30x1,5
SW 36 45
NSD00593a
LED
NSD00589
73,5
50
60
LED Sg
NSD00590
SW 36 45
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/205
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Almost flush 25 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 50 1.5 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG41 316AD00
I Dimensions
3RG41 31
90 A 180
B
75
3RG41 316AD0.
4 0
4 5 4 0
4 0
5 ,3
1 2 0
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3 3 0 1 4
6 0
M 2 0 1 ,5

B
2/206
Siemens FS 10 2009
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
NSD00595a
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300


Switching output
With terminal box

Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 426AD00
} B
24
3RG40 426KD00
I Dimensions
90 A 60 210
B 90
3RG40 426AD00
6 0 4 5 L E D Y E L E D G N M 2 0 x 1 ,5
3RG40 426KD00
6 0 4 5 L E D Y E M 2 0 x 1 ,5
40
2 4 ,5
7 7
7 7
2 4 ,5
0 0 6 0 1 a
NSD00608
N S D 0
5 ,3 4 1
B
5 ,3 4 1
N S D 0
0 0 6 0 6 a
4 5
4 5
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/207
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 30 mm

Switching output
With terminal box

1) See page 2/242.
Circuit diagram number1) 18
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG41 446CD01
I Dimensions
90 A 60 160
B 90
3RG41 446CD01
40
45 40
40
40
118
5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,35,3 30 14

60
NSD0_00570a
NSD00605
M 201,5
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.
2/208
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance 4-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 35 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm mm ms 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67
Increased operating distance (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 35 mm

Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.5 2.0 300 <2 25/30 (AC/DC) 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED IP67
Enclosure material Operating voltage UB DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At UB max Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

NO contact and NC contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, npn NO contact
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 1 8 F F F } B B
Order No.
Order No.
3RG41 483CD00 3RG41 483GD00

B
3RG41 483KB00
I Dimensions
80 A 15 160
B 90
3RG41 483..00
LED
NSD 01163
40
40 46 55
NSD 01166
30 40
5,3x7,3
M 12x1 40
The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.
69
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/209
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300

Enclosure material Operating voltage UB DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At 230 V AC Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 436AD00
} B
24
3RG40 436KD00
I Dimensions
80 A 15 160
B 90
3RG40 436AD00
80,3 65 27,5 LED YE LED GN Pg 13,5
NSD00625
3RG40 436KD00
80,3 65 LED YE 27,5 Pg 13,5
NSD00624
100 65
5,3 41,5
100 65
NSD00613
40
5,3 41,5
2/210
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 30/40 mm
Extra duty (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush / flush 30 mm / 40 mm
Molded plastic V V mA mA mA mA mA Hz mm ms 10 ... 65 40 300 10 2 200 Yellow LED Green LED IP65
Extra duty (AC/DC) 2-wire Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Not flush / flush 30 mm / 40 mm

Molded plastic 20 ... 320 20 ... 265 1.0 1.5 300 1800 5 25/60 (AC/DC) 2 100 Yellow LED IP65
Enclosure material Operating voltage UB DC AC No-load supply current I0 At 24 V DC At Umax Rated operational current Ie Continuous 20 ms Minimum load current Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

Circuit diagram number1) 23 24 } B
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No.
3RG40 336AD01
B
0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG40 336KD01
I Dimensions
80 A 15 160
Rated operating distance 30 mm
B 90
3RG40 336AD01
80,3 65 27,5 LED YE LED GN Pg 13,5
NSD00625
3RG40 336KD01
80,3 65 LED YE 27,5 Pg 13,5
NSD00624
40
100 65
NSD00613
5,3
B
100 65
5,3
41,5
41,5

80 A 160 B 90
NSD00627
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/211
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
V mA mA Hz mm ms Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 200 100 1.1 200 Yellow LED IP67 (not suitable for use under continuous wet conditions or outdoors)
Enclosure material Operating voltage UB No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 11 13 2 4 E, F E, F } }
With M12 connector
I Dimensions
55 A 150
B 35 120
3RG46 240..02
M 30x1,5
10
3RG46 243..02
M 30x1,5
10
SW 36 44
NSD00615a
73,5 51,5
60
LED
NSD00607a
LED
Sg
NSD0_00609b
2/212
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 36 44
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 40 mm

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact, pnp NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp
Circuit diagram number1) 19 23 B B
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG41 416AB03 3RG41 416AD00
I Dimensions
90 A 70 180
B 40 100
3RG41 416A.0.
4 0
4 5 4 0
4 0
5 ,3
1 2 0
6 0
3 0
B
1 4
M 2 0 1 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
NSD00621
L E D Y E L E D G N 7 ,3 5 ,3
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/213
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Operating distance 25 mm or 40 mm
Increased operating distance (65 V DC) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 25 mm or 40 mm, selectable

Switching output
With M12 connector

NO contact, pnp NO contact, pnp
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number 2 2 E, F E, F B B
Order No.
Connector can be offset in steps of 30
3RG41 413AB02 3RG41 413AB01
I Dimensions
70 A 50 180
B 40 50
3RG41 413AB02
40 40 45 40
3RG41 413AB01
40 45 40 40
30
30
NSD00623
5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,3x5,3 Sg 16
131,5 120 60
149 120 60
5,3 LED YE LED GN 7,3x5,3 13,3

NSD00618
A
M 12x1
NSD00617
M 12x1
Sg
16

40 A 70 180 B 40 100
The active surface can be adjusted The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. in 5 directions.
NSD01169
2/214
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI300
Molded plastic 10 ... 65 20 300 10 2 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP65
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Operating voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact or NC contact repositionable, pnp
Circuit diagram number1) 23 B
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG41 426AD00
3RG41 436AD00
I Dimensions
3RG41 42
120 A 70 180
B 40 150
3RG41 426AD00
6 0 4 5 L E D Y E L E D G N M 2 0 x 1 ,5
3RG41 436AD00
80,3 65 27,5 LED YE LED GN Pg 13,5
NSD00625
2 4 ,5
NSD 00636
5 ,3 4 1
N S D 0
0 0 6 0 1 a
100 65
7 7 4 5
5,3 41,5
3RG41 43
150 A 60 500 B 40 120
NSD00639
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/215
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
I Overview

Sensors without reduction factor
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXI400

M8
1.5 mm 4 mm
M12
3 mm 8 mm
M18
M30
40 mm x 40 mm
80 mm x 80 mm
5 mm 12 mm
10 mm 20 mm 15 mm 25 mm 35 mm 40 mm 75 mm
50 ... 75 mm (PXI.6.)
Output

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
Connection
M8 connector M12 connector Cable Terminal compartment
/ /
/ /
/ /
IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K
See page
from 2/217
from 2/218
from 2/220
from 2/222
from 2/224
2/228
2/216
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Reduction factor 1 3-wire M8 Flush 1.5 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 150 < 2000 0.16 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 13

2 4 2 4 A A E, F E, F }
3RG46 110AN01 3RG46 110GN01 3RG46 117AN01 3RG46 117GN01 3RG46 113AN01 3RG46 113GN01
With M12 connector
I Dimensions
4 A 12
B 3
3RG46 11 0.N01
M 8x1
3RG46 11 7.N01
M 8x1
3RG46 11 3.N01
M 8x1
NSD00350
49,6 40
42 40
NSD00319
NSD00348
NSD00349
57,4
40
LED
17
9,2
LED
1,6
M 12x1
6,2
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/217
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Reduction factor 1 3-wire M12 Flush 3 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Brass or stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 200 3000 0.04 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP67 IP68
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR Brass, chrome-plated

NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1)
Stainless steel
11 13 11 13
3RG46 120AN01 3RG46 120GN01 3RG46 120AN61 3RG46 120GN61
With M12 connector Brass, chrome-plated
NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn NO contact, pnp NO contact, npn
Brass, teflon-coated Stainless steel
2 4 2 4 2 2
E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F }
I Dimensions
24 A
B
9
3RG46 120.N..
M 12x1
3RG46 123.N..
M 12x1
SW 17
4 LED Sg
NSD00414
NSD00416
2/218
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00413
LED
SW 17
50,4
52
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Reduction factor 1 3-wire M8 Not flush 4 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel 10 ... 30 13 150 < 2000 0.16 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 13 }

2 4 2 4 A A E, F E, F } }
With M12 connector
I Dimensions
20 A 16 27
B
8
3RG46 21 0.N01
M 8x1 5
3RG46 21 7.N01
M 8x1
3RG46 21 3.N01
5
41,6 35
NSD00417
49,2 35
NSD00418
57
NSD00419
35
NSD0_00429
LED
17
1,6
9,2
M 12x1
6,2
LED
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/219
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure

Switching output

Stainless steel
11 13 11 13

E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F } }
2 4 2 4 2 2
I Dimensions
36 A
B 15
3RG46 130.N..
M 18x1
3RG46 133.N..
M 18x1
NSD00461
40
54
SW 24
30 LED Sg 53
4
NSD00463
NSD00460
LED
2/220
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operatingl current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure

Switching output

Circuit diagram Connector number1) type2)
Stainless steel
11 13 11 13

2 4 2 2
2 4
E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F
3RG46 223AN61 3RG46 223GN61
I Dimensions
2 3 3 6
B A
3RG46 220.N..
M 12x1
10
3RG46 223.N..
M 12x1
10 30
LED
2 4
1 6
SW 17
54 40
N S D 0 0 4 9 2
NSD00489
Sg
NSD00490
LED
B
SW 17
51
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/221
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400

Switching output

Stainless steel
11 13 11 13

E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F E, F }
2 4 2 4 2 2
I Dimensions
60 A
B
30
3RG46 140.N..
M 30x1,5
3RG46 143.N..
M 30x1,5
NSD00530
5 50 64
NSD00532
SW 36
SW 36 LED Sg
50 63
NSD00529
LED
2/222
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400

Switching output

Stainless steel
11 13 11 13
2 4 2 4 2 2
I Dimensions
27 A 54
B 36
3RG46 230.N..
M 18x1
10
3RG46 233.N..
M 18x1
10
24
40 54
NSD00541
SW 24
LED Sg
NSD00535
NSD00536
LED
4 SW 24
30 53
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/223
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Flush 15 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 0.3 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. IP68
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 2 4 28 29 E, F E, F }
Order No.
Order No.
With terminal box
3RG46 383AN01 3RG46 383GN01
0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG46 346AN01 3RG46 346GN01
I Dimensions
3RG46 38
40 A 80
B
3RG46 383.N01
LED 46 52 65
NSD00566
3RG46 346.N01
40
46 40
40
45
LED 7,35,3 30 14
30 40
5,3x7,3
40
M 20x1,5

B 45
3RG46 34
20 A 80
NSD 00569
2/224
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00597a
NSD 00569
Sg
60
114
5,3
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status indication Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure

Switching output

Stainless steel
11 13 11 13
3RG46 240AN01 3RG46 240GN01 3RG46 240AN61 3RG46 240GN61 3RG46 243AN01 3RG46 243GN01 3RG46 243AN05 3RG46 243GN05 3RG46 243AN61 3RG46 243GN61
2 4 2 4 2 2
I Dimensions
45 A 90
B 60
3RG46 240.N..
M 30x1,5
3RG46 243.N..
M 30x1,5
15
40
64
63
50
NSD00578
SW 36
NSD00575
LED
NSD00576
LED
Sg
5 SW 36
15
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/225
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
Reduction factor 1 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Not flush 25 mm
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 2 4 28 29 E, F E, F }
Order No.
Order No.
With terminal box
3RG46 483AN01 3RG46 483GN01

0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG46 446AN02 3RG46 446GN02
I Dimensions
50 A 20 160
B 75
3RG46 483.N01
LED 46 52 65
NSD00566
3RG46 446.N02
40
46 40
40
30
LED 7,35,3 30 14
30 40
5,3x7,3
40
M 20x1,5
2/226
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00597a
Sg
60
NSD 00599
114
5,3
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400

Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 0.8 8 Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s. IP68
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operating current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv LEDs Switching status Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Totally insulated Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

Circuit diagram number1) 2 4 28 29
Connector type2) E, F E, F }
Order No.
Order No.
With terminal box
3RG46 483AN11 3RG46 483GN11

}
0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG46 446AN01 3RG46 446GN01
I Dimensions
80 A 15 160
3RG46 483.N11
B 90
3RG46 483.N11
LED 46 52 65
NSD00566
3RG46 446.N01
40
46 40
40
LED 7,35,3 30 14
NSD 01065a
30 40
5,3x7,3
40
M 20x1,5

B
40 120
3RG46 446.N01
40 A 20 160
NSD00631
NSD0_00597a
Sg
60
114
40
5,3
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/227
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI400
V mA mA Hz mm ms Molded plastic 10 ... 30 15 200 250 1.5 8 Yellow LED Magnetic field resistant up to 75 mT r.m.s. IP67
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Totally insulated Degree of protection

Switching output
With terminal box

Circuit diagram number1) 28 29 }
Order No. 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
3RG46 436AN01 3RG46 436GN01
I Dimensions
120 A 80 400
B
40 150
3RG46 436.N01
NSD00637
5,5
65
NSD00641
Pg 13,5
65 80
B
27,5 40,5
2/228
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600
I Overview

Sensors with special approvals: ATEX proximity switches for hazardous areas, Zone 2 Devices with e1 type approval
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXI600 ATEX
SIMATIC PXI600 e1

M12
2 mm 4 mm
M18
M30
40 mm x 40 mm
M12
2 mm 4 mm
M18
M30
5 mm 8 mm
10 mm 15 mm 15 mm 35 mm
5 mm 8 mm
10 mm 15 mm
Output

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC
/ /
4
/ /
4
/ /
4
/ /
4
/ /
3
/ /
3
/ /
3
/
2/230
/
2/231
/
2/232
/ /
2/233 2/234
Connection
M12 connector Cable
IP65/IP67 IP68/IP69K
Approvals
Hazardous area, Zone 2/22 e1
See page
2/235
2/237
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/229
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600
ATEX, operating distance 2 mm ATEX, operating distance 4 mm
EX Zone 2 4-wire M12 Flush 2 mm
EX Zone 2 4-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR
NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); 10 EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); 10 EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X
3RG40 120CD00-0XA0 3RG40 120CD00-0XB0 3RG40 123CD00-0XA0 3RG40 123CD00-0XB0
With M12 connector
NO contact and NC contact, pnp Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); 1 F EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D,(dust); 1 F EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X
B B
B B
I Dimensions
A
12
4 A
13
B 4,5
3RG40 120CD00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 123CD00
M 12x1 4
3RG40 220CD00
M 12x1 6,5
NSD00332
NSD00363
3RG40 223CD00
M 12x1 6,5
48
4 65
NSD0_00421a
50
59
SW 17
SW 17
NSD00360a
NSD0_00420a
SW 17
LED
NSD00361b
LED (4x) Sg
LED
LED (4x) Sg
2/230
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 17
54
56
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR
With M12 connector
F F
B B
B B
I Dimensions
A
11
30
B
10
A 11
NSD00451
20
28
B 15
3RG40 130CD00
M 18x1
3RG40 133CD00
M 18x1 4
3RG40 230CD00
M 18x1
NSD00500
15
3RG40 233CD00
M 18x1 4
69 55 10,5
54 10,5
SW 24 58,5
SW 24
NSD00446b
SW 24
NSD00493
NSD00445
LED
LED (4x) M 12x1
LED
NSD00494b
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
54
69 55
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/231
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600


Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR
With M12 connector
F F
B B
B B
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. B Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99
I Dimensions
A
25
37
B 16
A 15
NSD00521
30
80
B 25
3RG40 140CD00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143CD00
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 240CD00
M 30x1,5 16
NSD00548
15
3RG40 243CD00
M 30x1,5 16
54
5 LED (4x) M 12x1 SW 36 58,5
54
SW 36 58,5
69 55
SW 36
NSD00518a
LED
NSD00519
LED (4x) Sg
NSD0_00544b
LED
SW 36
2/232
Siemens FS 10 2009
69
NSD00545b
55
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600
Ex Zone 2 4-wire Cubic 40 mm x 40 mm Flush 15 mm
V mA mA Hz mm mm ms Molded plastic 15 ... 34 30 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 0.75 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67
Ex Zone 2 4-wire Cubic 40 mm x 40 mm Not flush 35 mm

Molded plastic 15 ... 34 230 (24 V); 40 (34 V) 200 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 30 0.75 0.05 ... 7.7 100 Yellow LED Green LED IP67
Enclosure material Operating voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Rated operational current Ie Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H Power-up delay tv Switching status display Supply voltage Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection

Switching output
With M12 connector

Zone 2, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx nA II T6 X Zone 22, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X
Order No.
Order No.
NO contact and NC contact, pnp 1 1 F F B B
3RG40 383CD00-0XA0 3RG40 383CD00-0XB0
B B
3RG41 483CD00-0XA0 3RG41 483CD00-0XB0
I Dimensions
A
25
75
B 30
A 15
NSD 01164
80
160
B 90
NSD 01166
3RG40 383CD00
LED
NSD 01163
3RG41 483CD00
LED
NSD 01163
40 46 55
69
40 46 55
40
30 40
5,3x7,3
M 12x1 40
30 40
5,3x7,3
M 12x1 40
69
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/233
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600
e1, operating distance 2 mm e1, operating distance 4 mm
e1 3-wire M12 Flush 2 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 65 10 300 4000 0.1 40 Yellow LED IP68/69K
e1 3-wire M12 Not flush 4 mm

Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 65 10 300 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68/69K

Molded plastic 10 ... 65 10 300 800 0.2 40 Yellow LED IP68/69K

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

NO contact, pnp, 11 e1 NC contact, pnp, 12 e1 NO contact, pnp, 2 e1 NC contact, pnp, 3 e1
Circuit Connecdiagram tor type2) number1) A A
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 A A
3RG40 120AB31-4AA0 3RG40 120AA31-4AA0 3RG40 123AB31-4AA0 3RG40 123AA31-4AA0
A A
3RG40 220AB30-4AA0 3RG40 220AA30-4AA0
With M12 connector

E, F F A A
A A
A: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H
I Dimensions
A
12
B 5
4 A
13
B 4,5
NSD00363
3RG40 120...
M 12x1 4
3RG40 123...
M 12x1
3RG40 22 0..31-4AA0
M 12x1 6,5
3RG40 223..314AA0
M 12x1 6,5 4
NSD00332
3RG40 220..30-4AA0
M 12x1
4
62
60
SW 17 54
SW 17
NSD0_00424a
SW 17
SW 17
D00364
LED
NSD00365
LED (4x) Sg
LED
NSD00425a
NSD00364
LED (4x) Sg
LED
2/234
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 17
56
65
71
56
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600
e1, operating distance 5 mm


Switching output
Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) A A E, F F A A
Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 A
NO contact, pnp, e1 11 NC contact, pnp, e1 12 NO contact, pnp, e1 2 NC contact, pnp, e1 3
3RG40 130AB30-4AA0
1) See page 2/242. 2) See from page 2/268. A: Subject to export regulations AL = N and ECCN = EAR99H.
I Dimensions
11 A 30
B
10
3RG40 130...
M 18x1
3RG40 133...
M 18x1 4
54
NSD00451
NSD00446b
NSD00445
LED
M 12x1
SW 24 58,5 LED (4x)
SW 24
69 55
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/235
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600


Switching output
3RG40 230AB30-4AA0 3RG40 230AA30-4AA0
I Dimensions
20 A 11 28
B 15
3RG40 230..31-4AA0
M 18x1
3RG40 233..31-4AA0
M 18x1 4
3RG40 230..30-4AA0
M 18x1
15
54 10,5
69 55 10,5
SW 24 58,5
54
NSD00500
SW 24
NSD00493
NSD00445
LED
NSD00494b
LED (4x) M 12x1
LED
2/236
Siemens FS 10 2009
SW 24
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600


Switching output
3RG40 140AB30-4AA0 3RG40 140AA30-4AA0
I Dimensions
25 37
B 16 A
3RG40 14-0...
M 30x1,5 5
3RG40 143...
M 30x1,5 5
54
A
NSD00518a
LED
NSD00519
LED (4x) Sg
SW 36 58,5
NSD00521
SW 36
69 55
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/237
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI600


Switching output

NO contact, pnp, e1 2 NC contact, pnp, e1 3
NO contact, pnp, e1 11 NC contact, pnp, e1 12
3RG40 240AB30-4AA0 3RG40 240AA30-4AA0
I Dimensions
30 A 15 80
B 25
3RG40 240..31-4AA0
M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 243..31-4AA0
M 30x1,5 16
3RG40 240..30-4AA0
M 30x1,5 5
15
54
69
58,5
55
54
NSD00548
NSD0_00544b
SW 36
LED
NSD00545b
M 12x1
2/238
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00518a
LED (4x)
SW 36
LED
SW 36
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI900
I Overview

Pressure-resistant sensors up to 500 bar Sensors with analog output
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXI900

1 ... 4 mm (PXI.2.) 5 ... 10 mm (PXI.3.)
M14 Pressure resistant

3 mm
M12 Analog
0 ... 6 mm
Output
NO contact/NC contact pnp/npn Analog
/ /
3 4

10/15 ... 30/35 V DC
Connection
M12 connector Cable
IP65 / IP67 IP68 / IP69K
See page
2/240
2/241
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/239
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI900
Operating distance 3 mm, pressure resistant to 500 bar
Pressure resistant up to 500 bar 3-wire M14 Almost flush 3 mm
V mA mA Hz mm ms Stainless steel, sensor surface aluminum oxide ceramic 10 ... 30 10 200 500 0.1 10 IP68

Switching output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Circuit Connector diagram type2) number1) 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 E, F F E, F F }
With M12 connector
3RG46 520PG00 3RG46 520PF00 3RG46 520PB00 3RG46 520PA00 3RG46 523PG00 3RG46 523PF00 3RG46 523PB00 3RG46 523PA00
I Dimensions
8 A 12
B
3RG46 520P.00
12,3
3RG46 523P.00
12,3
30 18,6
30 18,6
M 14x1,5
NSD0_00409a
M 14x1,5
56,5
NSD00411
65
NSD0_00408a
A
SW 19
Sg
M 12x1 SW 19
X 2.4 mm for mounting in steel, X 1.2 mm for mounting in other metals
2/240
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXI900
Operating distance 0 6 mm with analog output
Analog output 4-wire M12 Almost flush 0 ... 6 mm
V mA Hz mm ms V V V Brass, nickel-plated 10 ... 30 10 1000 0.3 50 0 (0 ... +0.2 V) +2.7 (0.2 V) +5.0 (0.2 V) max. 10 mA 1.0 (0.2 mA) 5.0 (0.2 mA) 1 5 IP67
Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) No-load supply current I0 Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay tv Output voltage (A1) at 25 C With s = 0 mm With s = 3 mm With s = 6 mm Load current at voltage output Output current (A2) at 25 C With s = 0 mm With s = 6 mm Max. resistive load at current output With UB = 10 V With UB = 30 V Switching status display Precautions Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse-polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection
mA mA k k

Analog output
With 2 m cable, PUR

Voltage + current
Circuit Connector diagram type2) 1) number }
30
3RG46 120NB00 3RG46 123NB00
With M12 connector

Voltage + current 30 F }
I Dimensions
6 16
2 9 A
3RG46 120NB00
M 12x1 4
3RG46 123NB00
M 12x1 4
SW 17
50
NSD00488
60
NSD00485
Sg
NSD00486a
SW 17
40
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/241
Siemens AG 2008

Schematics
I Schematics
Circuit diagram 1
1 L+
Circuit diagram 11
BN
Circuit diagram 21
L+
1 L+
I
NO+NC
NSD00642
2 4 3
I
L
NO
NSD00652a
BK BU
I
L
NO
NSD00662
2/4 3 L
Circuit diagram 2
1 L+
Circuit diagram 12
BN L+
Circuit diagram 22
1 L+
I
NO
NSD00643
4 3 L
I
NC
NSD00653
BK BU L
I
4
NO
NSD00663
Circuit diagram 3
1 L+
Circuit diagram 13
BN L+
Circuit diagram 23
1 L+
I
NC
NSD00644
2 3 L
I
NO
NSD00654
BK BU L
I
NC NO
NSD00664
2/4 3 L
Circuit diagram 4
1 L+
Circuit diagram 14
BN L+
Circuit diagram 24
1/3
I
NO
NSD00645
4 3 L
I
NC
NSD00655
BK BU L
I
2/4
NC NO
NSD00665
L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+)
Circuit diagram 5
1 L+
Circuit diagram 15
BN L+
Circuit diagram 25
3 L
I
NC
NSD00646
2 3 L
I
BU
NO
NSD00656
I
L
NO+NC
NSD00666
4 2 1 L+
Circuit diagram 6
1 L+
Circuit diagram 16
BK
Circuit diagram 26
L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+)
1/3
L+
I
4
NO
NSD00647
I
L
NO
NSD00657
I
NO
NSD00667
X 2/4 L
BK
Circuit diagram 7
1 L+ L
Circuit diagram 17
BK
Circuit diagram 27
L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+)
1/3
L+
I
NO
NSD00648
4 3
I
BK
NC
NSD00658
I
NC NO
NSD00668
X 2/4 L
Circuit diagram 8
3
Circuit diagram 18
L1/L+ N/L N/L L1/L+
1 L+
Circuit diagram 28
1 L+
I
4
NO
I
NO+NC
NSD00659
4 2 3 L
I
NO
NSD01167
4 3 L
Circuit diagram 9
1
Circuit diagram 19
L1/L+ N/L N/L L1/L+
1 L+
Circuit diagram 29
1 L+
I
2
NC
NSD00650
I
NO
NSD00660
2/4 3 L
I
NO
NSD01168
4 3 L
Circuit diagram 10
BN L+
Circuit diagram 20
1 L+
Circuit diagram 30
BN BK WH +UB A1 A2 0V R
L2
I
NO+NC
NSD00651
WH BK BU
I
L
NC
NSD00661
2/4 3 L
NSD00669
L1
BU
Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60757:
BK = Black BU = Blue
BN = Brown WH = White
2/242
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Schematics
Examples of connections
Parallel connection
Series connection 1)
DC voltage version 2-wire proximity switches, for PLC

Not possible since the total of all proximity switch residual currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load
Parallel circuit with 1 contact (NO or NC)
Series connection with 1 contact (NO or NC) 1)
Not possible, as
b n -------------------
L BN BU
NSD00671
L BN BU
NSD00670
U 15 V 8V
I I
Ub PLC: 24 V
3-wire proximity switches, pnp

I
BK BU BN
L BN
I
L BN
I
L BN
I
BK BU
BK BU L
BK BU L
BK BU
BN
I
NSD00675
NSD00674
BK BU
NSD00672
L
NSD00673
Other connections are not permissible.

L
b min n ------------------- + 1 -
U U
2.5 V
3-wire proximity switches, npn

BU
I
Uc = Ub (n 2.5 V)
BK BN BU
L BU
I
L BU
I
L BU
I
BK BN
BK BN L
BK BN L
BK BN
BU
I
NSD00679
NSD00678
BK BN
NSD00676
L
NSD00677
b min n ------------------- + 1 -
U U
2.5 V
4-wire proximity switches, pnp

I
Uc = Ub (n 2.5 V)
BN BK WH BU BN BK WH BU L L
L BN BK WH BU BN BK WH BU L
L BN BK WH BU
L BN BK WH BU
L
NSD01189
NSD01190
NSD01187
NSD01188
AC/DC version
I
BK BK
L1(L )
I
L1(L ) BK BK
I
L1(L ) BK BK N(L )
NSD00682
L1(L ) BK BK N(L )
BK BK N(L )
I
NSD00683
BK BK N(L )
NSD00680
NSD00681
With DC voltage operation, a diode must be connected in parallel to the primarily inductive load.
The total of all proximity switch residual currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load
b n --------
20 V
Uc = Ub (n 8 V) Siemens FS 10 2009
2/243
Siemens AG 2008

Schematics
Ub= operating voltage Uc= minimum operating voltage of load n= number of proximity switches Umin = minimum permissible operating voltage 1) ) The power-up delay of the sensors must be considered when determining the switching times. Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60 757: BK = Black BN = Brown BU = Blue WH = White
2/244
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Response curves
y mm 1 0,8 0,6
NSD00301
The response curves are determined using standard targets according to EN 60947-5-2.
Operating distance 0.6 mm (normal) 3RG46 03, 3RG46 00, 3RG4610 Operating distance 0.8 mm (normal) 3RG 46 .0, 3RG 46 36
y mm 1 0,8 0,6
NSD00303
Operating distance 1 mm (normal) 3RG40 11

y mm 1,0 0,8 0,6
NSD00318
Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 .....33 (shorty)

y mm 1,5 1 0,5
NSD00330
2
1 2 +x 3 mm
0,4 0,2 1,5 -x 1 0,5 0 0,5 mm
0,4 0,2 2 -x mm 1 0 1
0,4 0,2 2 -x mm 1 0 1
1+x 1,5 mm
+x 2 mm
+x 2 mm
3 -x 2 mm
Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 .....05, 3RG46 01, 3RG46 11, 3RG46 37
y mm 1,5
Operating distance 1.5 mm (PXI400) 3RG46 11

y mm 1,5
Operating distance 2 mm (normal) 3RG40 12, 3RG40 52, 3RG40 7.

y mm 2
Operating distance 2 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 11

y mm 2 1,6 1,2
1 1
NSD00331 NSD00362
0,5
NSD00331
0,5
0,5 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
0,4 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
3 -x 2 mm
2 +x 3 mm
3 -x 2 mm
2 +x 3 mm
4 +x mm
4 +x mm
Operating distance 2.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 21, 3RG40 60

y mm 2,5 2 1,5
NSD00390
Operating distance 2.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 72

y mm 2,5 2
Operating distance 2.5 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 11

y mm 2,5 2 1,5
NSD00401
0,5 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
0,5 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
0,5 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
4 +x mm
4 +x mm
4 +x mm

y mm 3
Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 37

y mm 4
Operating distance 3 mm (PXI400) 3RG46 12

y mm 3,5 3,0 2,5 2,0
NSD00390
Operating distance 3 mm (pressure-resistant) 3RG46 52

y mm 3 2
2
NSD00394
3
NSD00396
NSD00415
1 6 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
1,0 0,5 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
3 -x 2 mm
2 +x 3 mm
4 +x 6 mm
4 +x mm
3 -x 2 mm
2 +x 3 mm
Operating distance 4 mm (normal) 3RG40 22, 3RG40 62

y mm 4

y mm 4

y mm 4 3
NSD00422
NSD00422
2 1 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
2 1 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
2 1 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
4 +x mm
4 +x mm
4 +x mm
NSD0_00426
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00394
1,5
NSD00355
0,8
2/245
Siemens AG 2008


y mm 5 4 3
NSD00450

y mm 5 4 3
NSD00474

y mm 5 4 3
NSD00462

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00482
2 1 -x 8 mm 4 0 4
2 1
4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4
1 -x 8 mm 4 0 4
8 +x mm
8 +x mm
-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x
mm
mm
8 +x mm
Operating distance 0 ... 6 mm (analog) 3RG46 12

5 4 3
NSD00487

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00499

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00499

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00491
y mm
2 1 1 2 3 4
4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4
4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4
4 2 -x 4 mm 2 0 2
5 S mm
I U
A A
mA V
8 +x mm
8 +x mm
4 +x mm
Operating distance 10 mm (normal) 3RG40 14, 3RG40 54, 3RG46 25.

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00516

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00516

y mm 10 8 6
NSD00531

y mm 20 16 12
NSD00542
4 2 -x 10 mm 5 0 5 10 +x mm
4 2 -x 10 mm 5 0 5 10 +x mm
4 2 -x 12 8 mm
8 4 -x 20 10 mm 0
4 0 4 8 12 +x mm
10 20 +x mm

y mm 12 10 8 6
NSD00540
Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 24, 3RG40 31, 3RG 40 64.

y mm 20 16 12

y mm 20 16

y mm 20 16 12
NSD00562
NSD0547
4 2 mm
4 -x 10 mm 5 0 5
4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8
4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8
-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x
mm
10 +x mm
16 +x mm
16 +x mm

y mm 20 16 12 8 4 -x 10 mm 5 0 5
NSD0547
Operating distance 15 mm (PXI400) 3RG46 34, 3RG46 38

y mm 25
20 15
10
NSD00568
5
mm
10 +x mm
-x 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 +x
mm
2/246
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD01170
Siemens AG 2008


y mm 20

y mm 25 20 15
Operating distance 20 mm (extra duty) 3RG 41 34, 3RG46 38

y mm 20

y mm 20 15
12
NSD00581
12 10
NSD00581 NSD00573 NSD01171
8 4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8
10 5 -x 40 20 mm 0
8 4 -x 16 mm 8 0 8
5 -x 20 10 mm 0
16 +x mm
20 40 +x mm
16 +x mm
10 20 +x mm

y mm 25 20 15
NSD00577

y mm 30 24 18
NSD00592
5 4 3 2 1

y mm 25 20 15
NSD00594

y mm 25 20 15
NSD00594
10 5
12 6 -x 40 20 mm 0
10 5 -x 20 10 mm 0
10 5 -x 20 10 mm 0
-x 12 8 4 0 4 8 12 +x mm mm
20 40 +x mm
10 20 +x mm
10 20 +x mm
Operating distance 25 mm (PXI400) 3RG46 44, 3RG46 48

y mm 30 25 20 15 10 5
NSD00598
Operating distance 30 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 42

y mm 30 24 18
NSD00604

y mm 30 24 18
NSD00604

y mm 50 40 30
NSD01172 NSD00640 NSD00620
12 6 -x 30 15 mm 0
12 6 -x 30 15 mm 0
20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0
-x 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 +x mm mm
15 30 +x mm
15 30 +x mm
20 40 +x mm

y mm 50 40 30
NSD00612
Operating distance 40 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 43

y mm 50 40
30
NSD00626

y mm 50 40 30
NSD00614

y mm 50 40
20 10 -x 30 15 mm 0
20 10 -x 30 15 mm 0
20 10 -x 80 40 mm 0
20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0
15 30 +x mm
15 30 +x mm
40 80 +x mm
20 40 +x mm

y mm 50 40
Operating distance 50 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 42 mm 50

40 30
NSD00635a

y mm 80 60
NSD00638

y mm 100 80 60 40 20 -x 80 40 mm 0
NSD00630
20 10 -x 40 20 mm 0
20 10
40 20
-x 60 40 20 0
20 40 +x mm
-x 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 +x
20 40 60 +x
mm
mm
mm
mm
40 80 +x mm
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/247
Siemens AG 2008

Glossary for proximity switches
I More information
Terms associated with the technology of proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC 60947-5-2.
Tightening torque
Excessive tightening of the nuts could cause mechanical damage to the proximity switches. The maximum permissible torques are specified in the Technical specifications.
Sensing area
The sensing area of an inductive proximity switch is the area through which an electromagnetic field is emitted. The corresponding activation element (target) is moved toward this area to trigger a switching process.
Operating distance sa
See operating distances
Axial distance to target x

Distance between the actuating element and the proximity switch axis z at the response point A.
Response curve
The line on which all response points A for a proximity switch can be found. The curve has been determined using the standard target. The sensor-related characteristics can be obtained from it. The proximity switch axis z coincides with the y axis.
y z x Ak x x B A B A H s x x
Output
The proximity switches are available with different output connections.
L+
Sensing face x
NSD0 01
LNSD01055
Ak A B H s x x y z
Response curve Point of response Release point Hysteresis Operating distance Direction of movement Axial distance to target Distance from proximity switch Reference axis
2-wire, DC or AC/DC, load connected in series with proximity switch

L+
Response point A
The position of the actuating element when the signal is output. The reference point is the bottom front edge of the actuating element.
LNSD01057
3-wire, DC, pnp, load connected between A and L

L+
Response delay tA
The response delay is the time required by the switching element to respond when the target enters or leaves the sensing range (IEC). The value is measured at s = 0.5 sn.
Non-equivalence
LNSD01056
The 4-wire proximity switches have two outputs: A1 with NO function and A2 with NC function.
3-wire, DC, npn, load connected between A and L+

L+
Indicators (LED)
Most proximity switches are equipped with one or two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates the switching status: in the case of proximity switches with NO function: Proximity switch attenuated = LED on, in the case of proximity switches with NC function: Proximity switch not attenuated = LED on, in the case of proximity switches with NO and NC function: Proximity switches attenuated = LED on, The green LED indicates the presence of the operating voltage. This function is only integrated in some of the devices.
A2 A1
LNSD01058
4-wire, antivalent, DC, load connected between A1, A2 and L
Output resistance
The proximity switches have a built-in output resistance so that the output voltage can follow the switching status even without an external load. A load resistance must be connected when operating with high switching frequencies (to reduce the electric time constant).
2/248
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Axial approach
Axial approaching of the target is where its center point is located in the reference axis.
Installed protective measures
Rated operating current Ie (output current)

The sensors are designed for a specific maximum output current. If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload protection will be activated. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have effects similar to an overload.
The protective circuits fitted in most proximity switches (see selection tables) enable them to be operated easily and protect the devices from damage. It is possible to protect against Spurious signals, Short-circuit and overload (DC), Interchanging of all connections, Wire break (connection L or L+), Transient overvoltage, Radio interference. Spurious signal suppression When applying the operating voltage, the status "attenuated" is simulated because of the transient status of the sensor coil even if no actuating element is present. The spurious signal suppression prevents the output being activated during this period. Short-circuit and overload All DC voltage devices with 3- and 4-wire connection are equipped with a short-circuit and overload protection. Shortcircuits between the output and the operating voltage connections do not damage the proximity switches and are permissible on a continuous bases; even unlimited overload is permitted. During the short-circuit the LEDs do not function. Reverse polarity protection All DC voltage devices with 3- and 4-wire connection are protected against polarity reversal of any connections. Wire break protection The DC version is designed in such a way that the proximity switch does not emit a fault signal if there is a wire break at any terminal (not applicable to 3RG46 and all 4-wire proximity switches). A fault signal is any signal other than 0 which is present for more than 2 ms and whose current is greater than the residual current. Inductive interference protection When switching off inductive loads, the output voltage rises (without a protective circuit) to high values which can destroy the output transistor. For this reason, the proximity switches at the output are given a Zener diode which limits the cutoff voltage to a safe value (3-wire proximity switches). When connecting inductive loads with a current >100 mA and simultaneously a switching frequency >10 Hz it is recommended that a freewheeling diode is mounted directly on the load (due to the power loss in the installed Zener diode). Protection against radio interference. The high-frequency sensitivity is reduced to the extent that regulation IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (testing level 10 V/m) is satisfied. Protection against electrostatic charges The devices are designed in such a way that electrostatic charges, as specified in IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (8 kV), do not destroy the devices.
Time delay before availability tv

Time between switching on the power supply and commencement of the proximity switchs operational readiness. See also spurious switch-on pulse.
Operating voltage
The operating voltage is specified including 10% residual ripple.
Operating temperature
The specified operating temperature range must not be exceeded. The proximity switch could then be damaged, and the operating response is undefined.
Reference axis z
Axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center. See also mounting instructions.
Mounting
Shielded proximity switches A proximity switch can be shielded if any attenuating material (metal) can be attached around the active surface without influencing the characteristic features. To ensure perfect functioning, a gap should be left in front of the active surface.
Sensing face
Metal
Proximity switch
NSD01060
Unshielded proximity switches A proximity switch cannot be shielded if a certain free zone is required around its active surface in order to retain the characteristic features (IEC).
Sensing face
Metal
Proximity switch
NSD01062
Semi-shielded proximity switches A proximity switch that is semi-shielded also requires a certain free zone. However, flush mounting is permissible in non-attenuating materials.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/249
Siemens AG 2008

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
All inductive proximity switches meet the protection requirements of the EMC guideline No. 89/336/EWG. This is verified by application of the EN 60 947-5-2 standard. For the individual checks the following EMC standards apply: EN 55011, IEC-CISPR 11, IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, IEC 61000-4-6
Magnetic fields
Permanent magnetic fields and low-frequency alternating fields do not generally influence the function of the proximity switches. Strong fields may saturate the ferrite core of the switch and thus increase the operating distance or switch the device. On the other hand, damage is not probable. High-frequency fields with frequencies of several hundred kHz can considerably interfere with the function (operating frequency of the sensors). Shielding is recommended in the event of difficulties with interference fields.
Free zone
Range around the proximity switch which must be kept free of materials which interfere with the characteristic features of the switch. The volume of the free zone is defined by the dimensions r, c and w, g (see diagram).
ZJ ZF ZB Q d w z r A g
NSD01061
Target (actuating element)

Parts made of metal with which proximity switches are actuated in service. Form, material and dimensions influence the response characteristic of the proximity switch (see reduction factors). The specified rated operating distances sn were determined using the minimum surface defined in the standard (see characteristic). The usable operating distance su is reduced if the surface is less than the minimum.
Ak c
Power supply units

Single-phase power supply units must be smoothed with at least 1000 F/A. For noise suppression reasons, this measure is also necessary with three-phase power supply units.
Standard target
The standard target is a defined part used for comparison measurements of the operating distances and sensing ranges. Material of standard target: St 37, 1 mm thick Dimensions of square standard target: the side length is equal to the diameter of the inscribed circle on the active surface of the proximity switch or three times the rated operating distance sn if 3 sn is greater than the diameter of the inscribed circle.
Ak A c, g d Q r w z ZB ZF ZJ
Response curve Point of response Partial heights of transition region Diameter of the proximity switch Sensing area Radius of free zone Mounting condition Reference axis Attenuation zone Free zone Inactive zone
Hysteresis H
Distance between the switching points when the target approaches or is removed from the proximity switch. The hysteresis causes a defined switching response for the devices. The switching distance always refers to the switch-on point.
Direction of movement Switch-off point Switch-on point Operating distance s Differential travel Response curves
NSD01053
npn connection
The output stage contains an npn transistor which connects the load to the negative operating voltage (0 V). The load is connected between the output and the positive operating voltage (+UB).
+U B
RL
A Load 0V
NSD01049
Resistance to oil
The proximity switches with degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for permanent operation in an environment containing oil. The following must therefore be observed: Lubricating oils Usually present no problem. Hydraulic oils, cutting oils These attack most plastics. In particular, the PVC lines become discolored and brittle. Measures: avoid contact with these liquids if possible, especially on the active surface.
Smallest operating current Im (minimum load current)

The current required to retain the conductivity of the switching elements in the ON state. This applies to 2-wire proximity switches.
2/250
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Parallel connection
Parallel connection of proximity switches to implement logical functions is possible with 3-wire and 4-wire proximity switches without problem, but not with 2-wire proximity switches. Please note: The power consumption increases. Leakage currents add up so that an impermissible voltage drop may occur at the load even in the off state. See diagrams on page 2/243.
Residual ripple
The maximum value of the residual ripple from peak to peak must not exceed 10% of the rated voltage Un. The switching response may be undefined if the residual ripple is large. Correction is possible using a larger smoothing capacitor or a regulated power supply.
Release point B
The position, e.g. in the attenuation zone, at which the bottom rear edge of the actuating element is located at the moment the signal changes when removing.
pnp connection
The output stage contains a pnp transistor which connects the load to the positive operating voltage (+UB). The load is connected between the output and the negative operating voltage (0 V).
+UB Load A
Operating distance
The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis. Measurement of the operating distance is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2 using a standard target and axial approach. Rated operating distance sn The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account. This operating distance applies when using the standard target according to IEC 60947-5-2. Reduction factors must be considered if the material and/or size of the target differ from those of the standard target. Real operating distance sr Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions. This is the operating distance for a particular switch measured according to IEC 60947-5-2. The manufacturing tolerance is 10%: 0.9 sn < sr < 1.1 sn Usable operating distance su Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured under defined conditions. This includes the additionally expected deviations caused by the variations in temperature and operating voltage within the specified ranges. The usable operating distance is between 90% and 110% of the real operating distance. This results in the following for a reliable design: 0.81 sn < su < 1.21 sn Ensured operating distance (actuation distance) sa Distance from the active surface at which actuation of the proximity switch is ensured under defined conditions. The ensured operating distance is between zero and the bottom value of the useful operating distance: 0 < sa < 0.81 sn
120% 100% +10% +10% -10%
s Ns n + 20%
RL
0V
NSD01050
Programming
Selection of NO or NC function using slide switch in bottom part of enclosure or plug-in jumper in the electronics base. Only with certain cubic proximity switches.
Reduction factors
The specified operating distance s refers to exactly defined measuring conditions (see operating distance). Other arrangements generally result in reduced operating distances. The reduction factors (see Technical specifications) are only approximate values. Deviations may result depending on different alloys and the type. Influence of geometry If a smaller target is used than the standard target defined in IEC 60947-5-2, the operating distance must be corrected by a reduction factor.
NSD01054
1,0 0,8 Reduction factor 0,6 0,4 0,2
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,2 Relative side length of target
Series connection
See diagrams on page 2/243.
Residual voltage
The residual voltage is the voltage measured across the load with the output disabled.
Residual current ir
The residual current is the current which flows in the load circuit of the proximity switch in the disabled condition. It is used to retain the function, and must primarily be observed with parallel connections.
sn -10% 80% s r min Sensing s min face s r max s max 0% Proximity switch
sa
NSD01063
sa sn sr smin smax
Operating distance Rated operating distance Real operating distance min. usable operating distance su (= operating distance sa) max. usable operating distance su
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/251
Siemens AG 2008

Switching element function
NO function An NO function results in a flow of load current when the target is sensed, and no flow of the load current when the target is not sensed. NC function An NC function results in no flow of load current when the target is sensed, and a flow of load current when the target is not sensed. IP69K Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete touch protection against electric shock. Protection against ingress of water during high-pressure jet cleaning. (i.e.: Water that is directed toward the enclosure at high pressure from any angle must not cause any damage to the device.)
Welding-resistant
Sensors which can be used in strong magnetic fields, e.g. during arc welding, or in fields of electrolysis plants. The maximum permissible value is specified for specially selected sensors, e.g. PXI400.
Switching frequency f
Number of switching operations of a proximity switch within a defined time interval. The switching frequency is the maximum possible switching rate between the damped and non-damped statuses at which the output circuit still delivers a defined signal sequence corresponding to the activation. It specifies the maximum permissible number of pulses per second at a constant pulse : Pause = 1 : 2 and half the rated operating distance sn. The measurement is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2.
Proximity switch 2m m Non-conductive material sn / 2 Target
Lateral approach
Lateral approach of the target is at right angles to the reference axis.
Voltage drop
A voltage drop (dependent on the current) occurs across the output transistor in the conductive state; the output voltage does not quite reach the associated operating voltage (to be particularly observed with a series connection and electronic inputs).
Current consumption
The current input is understood to be the current consumption of the proximity switch required to operate the oscillator, amplifier etc. It does not include the current flowing through the load. The no-load current I0 is the current drawn from the power supply without a load being connected.
Disc
NSD01052
IP67 Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete touch protection against electric shock. Protection against water when the enclosure is immersed in water under given pressure and time conditions. Water must not penetrate in amounts that would damage the device. Test conditions Sensor is immersed for 30 minutes in tap water at a depth of 1 meter. If a sensor is to be submersed for a longer period, or subjected to higher water pressure or humidity, devices with a higher degree of protection must be selected. IP68 Protection against the ingress of dust. Complete touch protection against electric shock. Protection against water when submersed. The testing of water-tightness is based on IEC 60068-2-17, Test ql. Contrary to the standard, the test object is stored in steam and not in water since greater stress exists with this type of storage. Parameters: Initial conditions: Operating distance at Tu = 25 C 5 C Test fluid: Tap water, Temperature of test fluid: 105 C 5 C, Test pressure: 12 N/cm (1.2 bar) Duration of exposure to stress: 5 days Post-treatment: Drying at room temperature and cooling. The final measurement is made as soon as the device under test has reached room temperature Final measurement: Operating distance at Tu = 25 C 5 C. The permissible change is 10% of the initial state.
Temperature drift
The specified operating distances refer to an ambient temperature of 20 C. Within the permissible temperature range of 25 to +70 C, the operating distance varies by max. 10% compared to the value at 20 C. The temperature of the target alone has practically no influence on the operating distance.
Repeat accuracy R
The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance sr at defined conditions. The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 C ( 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The difference between any two measurements must not exceed 10% of the real operating distance sr. The repeat accuracy is usually far better in the case of measurements immediately following one another.
2/252
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
I Notes
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/253
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Capacitive proximity switches Monitoring fill levels and more
Standards
The same standards are applicable as for the inductive proximity switches.
Type
The devices are available in DC or AC versions: The DC versions can activate electronic controllers (SIMATIC) or relays directly. With the AC version, the load (contactor relay, solenoid valve) is connected directly to the AC supply network (preferably 230 V, 50 Hz) in series with the proximity switches.
Function
The sensing face of a capacitive sensor is formed by two concentrically arranged metal electrodes that are equivalent to the electrodes of an unwound capacitor. The electrode surfaces A and B are connected into the feedback branch of a highfrequency oscillator that is tuned such that it does not oscillate when the surface is free.
A+
Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors and respond to the same degree almost instinctively when conducting and non-conducting materials in solid, powder or liquid state are to be measured. They impress customers especially in the case of fill level monitoring through non-metalic materials such as plastic or glass and through various materials in the case of counting objects.
B-
Highlights
Detection of all materials (e.g. plastics, wood, paper) Measurement of liquids through plastic tubes or glass pipes Measurement of aggressive chemicals Adjustable compensation of operating distance on the object
NSD0_00721
When an object approaches the active face of the sensor, it enters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces and causes a change in the coupling capacitance. The oscillator starts to oscillate; the amplitude is recorded by an evaluation circuit and converted into a switching command.
Switching rate
The build-up characteristics specific to other pulse/interval conditions may result in higher switching frequencies than those specified.
Operating distance
The stated values are applicable to a target of metal which is grounded and whose area corresponds to the sensing face of the proximity switch. The real operating distance sr for nonconductive targets is dependent on the relative dielectric constant r and the characteristic value (see characteristic curve).
80
er
60 40 20
Recognition of milk in cartons
1
NSD0_00722
20
40
60
80 %100 sr
Level control for bulk material in vessel
2/254
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
Dielectric constants r of various materials
Material
r
Material
r 2.3 2.3 3 2.9 4.4 4 3.7 4.5 2.8 2 2.2 2.2 1 80 2.5 3
Type
Operational voltage Residual ripple No-load supply current I0 Switching frequency f Repeat accuracy R Hysteresis H
Alcohol 25.8 Polyethylene Araldite 3.6 Polypropylene Bakelite 3.6 Polystyrene Glass 5 Polyvinylchloride Mica 6 Porcelain Vulcanized rubber 4 Pressboard Hard paper 4.5 Quartz glass Wood 2 ... 7 Quartz sand Cable insulating compound 2.5 Silicone rubber Air, vacuum 1 Teflon Marble 8 Turpentine oil Oiled paper 4 Transformer oil Paper 2.3 Vacuum, air Paraffin 2.2 Water Petroleum 2.2 Soft rubber Plexiglas 3.2 Celluloid Polyamide 5
DC
10 ... 65 (30) V Max. 10% 6 ... 12 mA 100 Hz Max. 2%
AC
20 ... 250 V max. 1.7 mA 20 Hz
Outputs
Rated operational current Ie For DC For 230 V AC (contactor up to size S3) - Continuous - Momentary up to 20 ms Smallest operating current Im Mainly inductive load Mainly resistive load Residual current Ir Voltage drop Lead length, max. permissible Degree of protection Ambient temperature Operation Bearings Shock resistance Resistance to vibration
0.02 ... 0.2 0.02 to 0.2 sr
200 mA
500 mA 5A 10 mA 5 mA 6 ... 12 mA Max. 1.8 V 300 m IP67 20 ... +70 C 40 ... +85 C 30 g, 11 ms duration 10 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude max. 1.7 mA Max. 7 V
Built-in protection
The protective circuits built into the DC versions make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage. Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit and overload protection Reverse polarity protection of connections Inductive interference protection
I Schematics
DC
Fig. 1
BN L
E
NSD00726
AC
Fig. 3
BN L
E2
NSD00725
Fig. 5
E1
K
NSD00723
BK BU
K
L
BK WH BU
BN BU GNYE
E
L N PE/SL
Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves
Proximity switch activated Load E1 switched on (NO function) Load E2 switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves Fig. 4
Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) or Load E switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves NO or NC function according to type Fig. 6
Fig. 2
K
NSD00727
1 4 3
E
L
K
NSD00724
1 4 2 3
E1
E2
K
NSD00728
1/3 2/4
L1
E N(L2)
Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves
Proximity switch activated Load E1 switched on (NO function) Load E2 switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves
Proximity switch activated Load E switched on (NO function) or Load E switched off (NC function) e.g. contactor relays, solenoid valves NO or NC function, programmable
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/255
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXC200
I Overview
SIMATIC sensors PXC200

10 65 V DC 20 250 V AC
I Selection table
SIMATIC PXC200
Operating distance
5 mm 10 mm 20 mm
M18
M30
40 mm
20 mm x 32 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
Operating voltage
10 ... 30 V DC 10 ... 65 V DC 20 ... 250 V AC
Number of wires
2 wires 3 wires 4 wires
Output
pnp NO contact NC contact NO contact and NC contact NO contact or NC contact
Mounting
flush
Connection
Plug, 8 mm Cable Terminal compartment
IP67
See page
2/257
2/257, 2/258
2/258
2/257
2/258
2/256
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
SIMATIC PXC capacitive proximity switch

SIMATIC PXC200
10 65 V DC
Number of wires Design Installation in metal Rated operating distance sn
Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie Displays Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type Red LED IP67 3RG16 130AB00 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 730AG00 3RG16 737AG00 Red LED IP67 3RG16 140AC00 V mA
1)
2)
3 M18 Flush 5 mm
Adjustable Molded plastic 10 ... 65 200
3 Cubic 20 mm 32 mm Flush 5 mm
Fixed comparison Metal 10 ... 30 200
4 M30 Flush 10 mm
Adjustable Metal with molded-plastic head 10 ... 65 200
1) For operation with grounded metal. 2) With an alignment sr > sn, the hysteresis can increase significantly.

Switching output Circuit diagram Connector number type 1 3 } Order No. 3 0.5 mm2 Order No. 3 0.25 mm2 } Order No. 4 0.34 mm2 }
With LiYY cable, 2 m

NO contact, pnp NO contact and NC contact, pnp (antivalent)
3RG16 130AB00

3RG16 730AG00
3RG16 140AC00
With connector, 8 mm
2 A, C
NO contact, pnp
3RG16 737AG00
I Dimensions
3RG16 130AB00
M 18x1
3RG16 730AG00
20 3 32 8
NSD00741
3RG16 140AC00
M 30x1,5
LED
SW 24 60 70
3,4 13 4,3
NSD0_00729a
SW 36 61 20 3 32 8
NSD00742
NSD0_00736a
2,5
LED
3,4 13 4,3
NSD00744 NSD00740
4 3 2 1 -x 8 mm 4 0 4 8
4 3 2 1
8 6 4 2
+x mm
-x 8 mm
+x mm
-x 8 mm
+x mm
Standard target: Metal, 20 mm 20 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground
Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Siemens FS 10 2009
2/257
NSD00733
y mm 5
y mm 5
y mm 10
3RG16 737AG00
81
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXC200
10 65 V DC
Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material Operational voltage (DC) Rated operational current Ie Displays Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 146AC00 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 556AC00 Yellow LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 306AC00 V mA
1)
2)
4 M30 Flush 10 mm
4 40 mm Flush 20 mm

Switching output
With terminal box

NO contact and NC contact, pnp (antivalent)
Circuit diagram number 4
Connector type
Order No. to 2.5 mm2 }
3RG16 146AC00
3RG16 556AC00
3RG16 306AC00
I Dimensions
3RG16 146AC00
M 30x1,5
3RG16 556AC00
40
3RG16 306AC00
40
NSD0_00567a
34
SW 36 61
55
7,35,3
30
90
46
115
LED
NSD00731
LED
NSD00730
LED 5,3
Pg 9
Pg 9
60
114
Pg 13,5
16
Fixing clamp, 40 mm, included in scope of supply.
NSD00733 NSD00735
8 6 4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4 8
16 12 8 4
16 12 8 4
+x mm
-x 16 mm
16 +x mm
-x 16 mm
16 +x mm
2/258
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00734
y mm 10
y mm 20
y mm 20
Siemens AG 2008

SIMATIC PXC200
20 ... 250 V AC
Effective operating distance sr Enclosure material Operational voltage (AC) Rated operational current Ie LEDs Operating distance Operational voltage Degree of protection Type Red LED IP67 Red LED Green LED Red LED Green LED IP67 Red LED Green LED IP67 3RG16 306LD00 V mA
1) 2)
2 + PE M30 Flush 10 mm
Adjustable
2 40 mm Flush 20 mm
Metal with molded- Molded plastic plastic head 20 ... 250 500
3RG16 140LB00, 3RG16 146LD00 3RG16 556LD00 3RG16 140LA00

Switching output Circuit Connector diagram type number 5 5 } } } Order No. Order No. Order No.
With LiYY cable, 2 m

NO contact NC contact
3 0.5 mm2
With terminal box
to 2.5 mm2
3RG16 140LB00 3RG16 140LA00 3RG16 146LD00

}
to 2.5 mm2
NO contact or 6 NC contact programmable
3RG16 556LD00
to 2.5 mm2
3RG16 306LD00
I Dimensions
M 30x1,5
SW 36 61 55
NSD0_00567a
3RG16 14 0LB00, 3RG16 140LA00
3RG16 146LD00
M 30x1,5
3RG16 556LD00
40
3RG16 306LD00
40 34
SW 36 61
115
81
Pg 9 Pg 9
NSD00730
LED 5,3
NSD0_00729a
60
LED
NSD00731
114
LED
7,35,3
90
30
46
LED
Fixing clamp, 40 mm, included in scope of supply.
Pg 13,5
16
NSD00733
8 6 4 2 -x 8 mm 4 0 4 8
NSD00734
16 12 8 4
16 12 8 4
+x mm
-x 16 mm
16 +x mm
-x 16 mm
16 +x mm
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD00735
y mm 10
y mm 20
y mm 20
2/259
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
SONPROG programming device for SIMATIC PXS
I Overview
The programmed values are saved in the Sonar proximity switch and are retained even without interface or after the supply voltage has been disconnected. The programmed values can be printed out and recorded. They will then be immediately available, for example for series applications or for replacement of the Sonar proximity switch.
Parameters
Operating range The commands "Lower limit of operating range" and "Upper limit of operating range" are used to define a window within the sensing range of the Sonar proximity switch. If an object enters the operating range, the switching output is active (with NO contact). If an object is outside the operating range, the switching output is not active. In the case of Sonar proximity switch of M30 K2 compact range with two switching outputs, the second switching output is active when an object is located between the blind zone and the operating range.
PC with SONPROG programming device and Sonar proximity switch
Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 PC programming SONPROG device and the relevant software, the following Sonar proximity switches can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements: M30 K1 and M30 K3 compact ranges M18 compact range K65 compact form
Blind zone
Sensing range
Sound cone
Hysteresis The hysteresis can be adjusted to move the switch-on point and the switch-off point at the limits of the operating range away from each other. This prevents output flutter and level control tasks can be solved elegantly.
Scope of supply
PC-Interface, Plug-in power supply Connecting leads to the PC and Sonar proximity switch SONPROG software for Windows.
I Function
The SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device allows the user to program several Sonar proximity switches simultaneously. The lower and upper limit of the operating range can be saved at the click of a button for copying to other Sonar proximity switches. For each Sonar proximity switch, the following parameters can be set: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Hysteresis Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Function as diffuse or reflex sensor Fill level mode
BERO
4 1
Differential travel
2 3
5 6 7
Differential travel Container

NSD0_01192a
1) Inhibit range 2) Operating range 3) Sensing range 4) Blind zone 5) Switching output upper limit when fill level is falling 6) Switching output upper limit when fill level is rising 7) Switching output lower limit when fill level is falling 8) Switching output lower limit when fill level is rising
Example: Fill level monitoring with adjustable hysteresis
Switching element function The function of the switching output that was set at the factory can be changed, e.g. from NO to NC. The assignment of the connections does not change as a result. This means that when a device with NO function is changed to NC, the switching output remains assigned to pin 4.
2/260
Siemens FS 10 2009
NSD0_00756
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
SONPROG programming device for SIMATIC PXS
Switching rate The Sonar proximity switch can be switched over from standard switching frequency (in accordance with the technical specifications) and rapid switching frequency (3 times the standard value). Note: A Sonar proximity switch with a rapid switching frequency is more sensitive to disturbance.
NSD0_00801
Attenuation (see sound cones) The susceptibility of the receive amplifier is reduced here. Weakly reflecting objects at the edge of the sound cone are suppressed. It is also possible to reduce the size of the sound cone here electronically. The permitted values are 0 (maximum sensitivity) to 7 (minimum sensitivity).
Type Required hardware Required software Operational voltage 3RX4 000
PC with VGA graphics card, serial interface COM1 or COM2 MS-DOS Version 3.1 and higher, Windows 3.X, Windows 95, 98, Windows NT 100 240 V AC, 24 V DC
Analog distance measurement Proximity switches with an analog output can detect the distance to an object. This distance is converted into a proportional analog output signal (0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA). The resolution of the analog output is at least 1 mm within the preset limits.
R is in g c h a r a c te r is tic
Software update on the Internet: www.siemens.com/simatic-sensors/px
2 0 m A

SONPROG programming device
} } Preferred type, available from stock.
Order No.
4 m A P 1
In itia l v a lu e 5 0 c m
F a llin g c h a r a c te r is tic F in a l v a lu e 9 0 c m S e n s in g ra n g e
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 9 3
3RX4 000
P 2
2 0 c m
1 3 0 c m
Example
Blind zone A value must not be set for the blind zone that is less than the minimum value. This is the time that the Sonar proximity switch requires to switch over from send to receive mode. The blind zone can be moved away from the Sonar proximity switch (i.e. increased) to permit interfering objects in the foreground to be ignored. The interfering echo resulting from such an object is suppressed by extending the blind zone, and detection of the desired object is possible again. The range of the Sonar proximity switch can be reduced in this case because part of the echo from the object to be detected is suppressed. However, objects are still not permitted within the original blind zone. It is important to ensure with this setting the object does not reflect ultrasound so well that double or triple echoes arise that give the impression of a more distant object. (a fault of this kind cannot occur during normal operation because only the first echo is accepted as valid). Sensing range Reducing the sensing range can enhance the resolution of the Sonar proximity switch. With large sensing ranges, it is not possible to adjust some values in steps of one millimeter. The minimum resolution of a Sonar proximity switch is 1 mm. Mean value generation Unfortunate reflective conditions or moving surfaces (e.g. in the case of moving liquids and bulk material on conveyors) can cause the measured values to change continuously, which results in constant switching. The Sonar proximity switch allows a mean value to be generated from up to 255 measurements. Failed signals (when no object is in the sensing range) are ignored on mean-value generation. After each measurement, a mean value is generated immediately from the new measured value and the stored number of old values. The response time of the Sonar proximity switch is, therefore, not extended. A delay only occurs at the end of a measurement if the object is removed from the sensing range. This delay corresponds to the measurement cycle time multiplied by the saved number of mean values.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/261
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Distributors
Type
Operational voltage Max. current per switching output Connections V DC A
3RX8 000-0JA
24 2 M12 connector-in connections (socket in distribution unit) in color
Core identification, PUR cable Display Per output Operational voltage Enclosure material Degree of protection Operating temperature C
Yellow LED Green LED Molded plastic IP65, in inserted and locked state 15 ... +80
Type Distribution units, quadruple

5 m PUR line 10 m PUR line } } } } } } }
Order No.
54
Distribution units, 6x
NSD0_01030a
3RX8 000-0JA40-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA40-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA60-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA60-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA80-1AF0 3RX8 000-0JA80-1AL0 3RX8 000-0JA80
5 m PUR line 10 m PUR line
Distribution units, 8x
5 m PUR line 10 m PUR line
A Dimension A = 82 (4-way distribution unit) 100 (6-way distribution unit) 127 (8-way distribution unit)
18
Distributors
Preassembly possible, with connecting hood
I Schematics
Sockets for M 12 round plugs Switching outputs
1 4 1 5
Socket 1
ye
1-6 (6-way distribution unit) 1-8 (8-way distribution unit)
3 4 4 1 5 3 2
Socket 2
ye
3 2
L-
7 (6-way distribution unit) 9 (8-way distribution unit)

L+
4 1 5
Socket 3
gn
ye
3 2
8 (6-way distribution unit) 10 (8-way distribution unit)

P E
4 1 5
Socket 4
ye
3 2
NSD0_01031a
2/262
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plastic fiber-optic conductor for SIMATIC PXO
I Overview
The plastic fiber-optic cables are used in combination with the photoelectric proximity switches of the LV70, K30 and K31 types. The sensing range of the plastic fiber-optic wires depends on the type of photoelectric proximity switch used. The main advantages are: Extremely small dimensions Small bending radii For cutting to length Visible light Wide range of types Attractively priced.
TW (mm) 50 40 30 20 10 a TW
NSD0_00913a
20
10
10
20 a (mm)
TW = Sensing range
Typical shape of switching zone
Attenuation at 660 nm, max. Angle of incidence, max. Standard length Bending radius, min. Tensile load, max. Sleeve material Degree of protection Sensor head Sensor Temperature range Solvent resistance C IP67 IP65 40 ... +75 Not resistant m mm N dB/m 0.4 56 2 0.1 25 30 Polyethylene
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/263
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plastic fiber-optic wire for diffuse sensor
M 3 (P=0,5)
NSD00914
Type
Sensing range
For photoelectric proximity switch

}
Order No.
2 single fibers, 1 mm, for cutting Adapter sleeves to 2.2 mm included in scope of supply.
7 12
3RX7 001
2
NSD00915
2000 + 100 M 6 (P=0,75)
20 mm 40 mm 35 mm 2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting mono/axial 60 mm 120 mm 155 mm
K31 design K30 design LV70 design } K31 design K30 design LV70 design
3RX7 002
2,2 2000 + 100 M 6 (P=0,75)

NSD00915
1,8 15
2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting coaxial 60 mm 120 mm 150 mm K31 design K30 design LV70 design
3RX7 003
2,2 2000 + 100 M 3 (P=0,5)

NSD00917
1,8 15
2 single fibers, 1 mm, for cutting Adapter sleeves to 2.2 mm included in scope of supply.
7 12 1,2 90 + 2 -
3RX7 004
20 mm 40 mm 60 mm 2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting 60 mm 120 mm 140 mm
K31 design K30 design LV70 design
2000 + 100 M 6 (P=0,75)

NSD00918
3RX7 005
2,2
2,5
2000 + 100 -
1,8 15
90
Plastic fiber-optic wire for thru-beam sensors

2 single fibers 2.2 mm, for cutting (fine internal fiber)
M 3 (P=0,5)
NSD00919
} K31 design K30 design LV70 design
3RX7 006
60 mm 120 mm 150 mm
7 12
2,2
2000
+ 100 -
2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting 200 mm 400 mm 350 mm K31 design K30 design LV70 design
3RX7 007
M 4 (P=0,7)
NSD00920
M 2,6 (P=0,45)
2,2
11
2000 + 100 -
2 single fibers 2.2 mm, for cutting (fine internal fiber)

M 3 (P=0.5)
NSD00921
3RX7 008
60 mm 120 mm 120 mm
7 12
0.9
2.2
90 + 2 -
2000 + 100 -
2/264
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Type Sensing range
200 mm 400 mm 350 mm
For photoelectric proximity switch

Order No.
2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting
3RX7 010
M 4 (P=0,7)
NSD00922
1,2
2,2
11 2000 + 100 -
90 + 2 -
2
2 single fibers, 2.2 mm, for cutting
3RX7 012
LV70 design
16x0,265
FS10_00281
5,25
20 10 5
10
250 mm
2,2
3,2
Front lenses
4
L=2000 mm
NSD00923
4,5
Front lenses (1 pair) for use with fiber type 3RX7 007 1500 mm 3000 mm Front lenses 90 (1 pair) for use with fiber type 3RX7 007 K31 design K30 design
3RX7 901
M 2,6 (P=0,45)
5,5 8,7
NSD00924
3RX7 902
K31 design K30 design
4,5
M 2,6 (P=0,45)
5,8 9,7
250 mm 500 mm
Cutting tool for fiber-optic cable
Cutting tool
for plastic fibers
3RX7 918
NSD00955
51
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/265
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Reflectors for SIMATIC PXO
Version D25
Typical range approx. 40 %, referred to D84 design
Standard for form

}
Order No.
3RX7 914-0AA01
FS10_00244
23 26,2
5,5
D40
Typical range approx. 60%, referred to D84 design
3RX7 915-0AA01
FS10_00245
37 40,2
5,5
D84
M12, M18, K30, K31, C40, K80
3RX7 916-0AA01
4,6
FS10_00246
78,3 82,1
2,5 8,5
7,5
FS10_00248
S48
M18P
3RX7 922-0AA01
86 74 48
63 8,5
4,5
4,6
R45
48 61 71
light grid
3RX7 924-0AA01
FS10_00249
36 48 51,15
2/266
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Reflectors for SIMATIC PXO
FS10_00241
3,85 3,8
3,5
Version R60
Typical range approx. 40 50%, referred to D84 design
Standard for form

K20, K21 }
Order No.
3RX7 305-0AA01
41 36,95 34
51,99 56 60
2
R70
Typical range approx. 30%, referred to D84 design }
3RX7 920-0AA01
FS10_00247
58,2 71 82 4,5
22
4 7,5
FS10_00242
R84
High degree of reflection for long range
3RX7 306-0AA01
85 80 77
3,5
66,97 77 85
3,2 8,5
60,3
FS10_00243
RL50
3,85
L50
3RX7 307-0AA01
30
Reflector for laser light
51,4 47,25 29,5
4,8 47,9 51,25
8,8
3,4 8,5
Reflecting foil 100 mm 100 mm, range 50 60 %, referred to D84 design Reflecting foil 250 x 250 mm
Standard for L90L design } Preferred type, available from stock.
3RX7 917-0AA01 3RX7 332
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/267
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
Fig. 1
max. 32 8,5
FS10_00326
Fig. Type1) Cable2) Length m 8 mm cable sockets (female) for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP65
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 1 1 A A B B PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 10 5 10
Color
Order No.
Black Black Black Black
} } } }
3RX8 000-0BH32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BH32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BH42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BH42-1AL0
Fig. 2
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 1 1

8,5
max. 20
FS10_00327
8 mm angular cable sockets (female) for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP65
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 2 2 A A B B C C PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 10 5 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black Black/ clear Black/ clear
Fig. 3
FS10_00328
} } } } } }
max. 21
3RX8 000-0BJ32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BJ32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BJ42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BJ42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BJ34-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BJ34-1AL0
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2

8,5
2 2 3 3
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with 2 LEDs for pnp proximity switches
Fig. 4
max. 35 10
M8 cable sockets (female) for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

4 A A A A PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black } } } } 4 5
FS10_00329
Fig. 5
M8 12
max. 40
FS10_00330
Coupling plug with solder- Black ing pins, max. 0.25 mm2 Coupling plug, can be assembled PUR PUR 5 10 Black
3RX8 000-0BB32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BB32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BB35 3RX8 000-0BB37 3RX8 000-0BB42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BB42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BB45 3RX8 000-0BB47
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 4 B B B B Black Black } } } } 4

FS10_00331
Fig. 6
max. 13
M8x1
5 6
Coupling plug with solder- Black ing pins, max. 0.25 mm2 Coupling plug, can be assembled Black
max. 60
Cable sockets (female) with special lengths available as options: 1) For terminal assignment, see page 2/273. Minimum order quantity: 50 units 2) PUR cables suitable for trailing Delivery time on request. } Preferred type, available from stock. Extra charge per m.
2/268
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
Fig. 7
max. 20
FS10_00332
Fig. Type1) Cable2) Length m Color M8 angular cable sockets (female) for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2 7 A A A PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black } } } 7 8
Order No.
M8 10
Coupling plug with solder- Black ing pins, max. 0.25 mm2 PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 (pnp) 10 5 (npn) 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black Black Black
3RX8 000-0BC32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BC32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BC35 3RX8 000-0BC34-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BC34-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BC30-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BC30-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BC42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0BC42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0BC45
Fig. 8
FS10_00333
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs 9 9 C C D D B B B } } } } } } }
max. 30 M8 12
Fig. 9
9 9 7
max. 20
FS10_00334
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 7 8
M8 10
Fig. 10
Coupling plug with solder- Black ing pins, max. 0.25 mm2
M12x1 15
M12 cable sockets (female) for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67
10 10 E E E E F F F PUR PUR PUR, shielded PUR, shielded PUR PUR 5 10 2 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black Black Black Black } } } } } } }
FS10_00335
max. 50
11 11
3RX8 000-0CB32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1GC0 3RX8 000-0CB32-1GL0 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB45 3RX8 000-0CB47 3RX8 000-0CB52-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1GF0 3RX8 000-0CB52-1GL0 3RX8 000-0CB55 3RX8 000-0CB81-1GF0
Fig. 11 M12x1
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 10 10 12
15
FS10_00336
max. 50
Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible Coupling plug with quickconnection technology PUR PUR PUR, shielded PUR, shielded 5 10 5 10
13
Fig. 12
FS10_00337
Black
5-pole, 5 0.34 mm2 10 10 G G G G G Black Black Black Black Black } } } } }
18
max. 60
Fig. 13
max. 20 M12x1
FS10_00338
11 11 12
Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible PUR, shielded 5
max. 60
8-pole, 8 0.25 mm2 11 O Black }
Cable sockets (female) with special lengths available as options: Minimum order quantity: 50 units Delivery time on request. Extra charge per m.
1) 2)
For terminal assignment, see page 2/273. PUR cables suitable for trailing. } Preferred type, available from stock.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/269
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
Fig. 14
FS10_00339
Fig. Type1) Cable2) Length m Color M12 angular cable sockets (female) for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, 14
M12x1 max. 15
Order No.
27
E E E E
PUR PUR PVC PVC
5 10 5 10
} } } }
14 14 14
27
Fig. 15
FS10_00340
3RX8 000-0CC32-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1BF0 3RX8 000-0CC32-1BL0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1BF0 3RX8 000-0CC34-1BL0 3RX8 000-0CC36
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp proximity switches, NO contact only 3)
M12x1 max. 15
15 15 15 15 16
H H H H H
PUR PUR PVC PVC
5 10 5 10
} } } } }
Fig. 16
FS10_00341
M12x1
Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible
Fig. 17
FS10_00342
3-pole, 3 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp proximity switches, NO or NC 3) 15 15 J J F F F PUR PUR PUR PUR 5 10 5 10 Black Black Black Black Black } } } } }
3RX8 000-0CC38-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC38-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC45 3RX8 000-0CC44-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC44-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC46 3RX8 000-0CA06 3RX8 000-0CC52-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC52-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CC55
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2 14

26 M18x1
43
14 16
Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible PUR PUR 5 10
4-pole, 4 0.34 mm2, with LEDs 3) 15 15 16 K K K Black Black } } } }
With terminal compartclear ment, transparent for LEDs LED insert for angular cable plug, transparent
5-pole, 5 0.34 mm2 14 14 16 G G G PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black Black } } }
Coupling plug with terminal compartment, preassembly possible
M18 angular cable sockets (female) for screw-type mounting, degree of protection IP65, 4-pole
17 F Preassembly possible, Black with terminal compartment }
1) 2) 3)
3RX8 000-0DC45
For terminal assignment, see page 2/273. PUR cables suitable for trailing. Only limited use of sonar proximity switches.
2/270
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
Fig. 18 M8x1
Fig. Type1) Cable2) Length m Color M8 coupling sockets (female), degree of protection IP67
FS10_00343
Order No.
10
For extension cable (metal screw cap) can be assembled; max. 0.34 mm2 18 18 3-pole 4-pole Black Black } }
max. 60
Fig. 19
FS10_00344
M12 coupling sockets (female), degree of protection IP67

for extension cable (metal screw cap) with terminal compartment, cable gland max. 6 mm
max. 60
3RX8 000-0BD37 3RX8 000-0BD47
20 M12x1
2
} } }
19 19 20
L M L
4-pole 5-pole 4-pole
Black Black
Fig. 20
max. 15 M12x1
FS10_00345
Can be Black assembled; 2 max. 0.34 mm
3RX8 000-0CD45 3RX8 000-0CD55 3RX8 000-0CD47
M12 angled coupling sockets (female), degree of protection IP67

max. 60
for extension cable (metal screw cap) with terminal compartment, cable gland max. 6 mm 21 21 L M 4-pole 5-pole Black Black } }
Fig. 21
FS10_00346
max. 50
For AS-Interface, degree of protection IP67

M12 cable plugs (male)
22
M12x1 20
3RX8 000-0CE45 3RX8 000-0CE55
4 0.34 mm2 (metal screw cap) L L PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black } } 22
Fig. 22
M12x1 15
FS10_00347
M12 angular cable plugs (male)

4 0.34 mm2 (metal screw cap) 23 23 L L PUR PUR 5 10 Black Black
3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CD42-1AL0 3RX8 000-0CE42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CE42-1AL0
} }
max. 50
Fig. 23
FS10_00348
15 max. 40 Fig. 24
Flush-type M12 connector

PVC
Adapter with single cores, 4-pole with single cores 24 24 Twistable Not twistable 0.5 0.2 } }
SW23
FS10_00349
3RX8 000-0CA40-1JA5 3RX8 000-0CA40-1JA2
1) 2)
For terminal assignment, see page 2/273.
Suitable for trailing. } Preferred type, available from stock.
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/271
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
1
Version
M12x1 15
Type1)
E, L
Cable
max. 50
Wire cross- Length m section/color

3 0.34 mm2, Black 0.6 1 1.5 } } }
Order No.
FS10_00324
M12x1
max. 50
with M12 socket (female) and M12 plug (male) Connection to 3RX8 000-0JA0 distributor (metal union nut), PUR cable Caution: Only terminal 4 (NO) is connected. F, L
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
15
4 0.34 mm2, Black
0.6 1 1.5 0.6 1 1.5
} } } } } }
M8x1 10
FS10_00323
Cable
A, L
M12x1 15
max. 50
with M8 socket (female) and M12 plug (male) Connection to 3RX8 000-0JA0 distributor (metal union nut), PUR cable Caution: Only terminal 4 (NO) is connected. B, L
3 0.34 mm2, Black
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0FF32-1AB5
4 0.34 mm2, Black
0.6 1 1.5 1 2
} } } } }
M8x1
10
Cable
with M8 socket (female) and M8 plug (male), PUR cable
3 0.34 mm2, Black
3RX8 000-0FF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0FF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0FF42-1AB5 3RX8 000-0EF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0EF32-1AC0
M8x1
10
FS10_00321
10
Cable
with M8 angular socket (female) and M8 plug (male), PUR cable
3 0.34 mm2, Black
1 2
} }
3RX8 000-0EG32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0EG32-1AC0
M8x1 10
FS10_00322
Cables, 20 m, black
According to the number of cores, the cables can be used for all inductive proximity switches, sonar proximity switches and optical proximity switches. PUR PUR PUR, shielded
FS10_00325
3 0.34 mm2 4 0.34 mm

2
} } } }
4 0.34 mm2
T-distributor, M12 connection

45
3RX8 000-0KA32-1AR0 3RX8 000-0KA42-1AR0 3RX8 000-0KA42-1GR0 3RX8 000-0JA20
3RX8000-0JA20
For connection of thru-beam sensors to AS-Interface modules
25
1)
For terminal assignment, see page 2/273. } Preferred type, available from stock.
2/272
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Plug-in connections
I Schematics
1 4 3
NSD01032a
Plug connections Type A, E

BN (L ) BK (NO) BU (L )
Type B, F, L, N, P
1 4 2 3
NSD0_01033a
Type B, F, L, N, P
BN (L ) BK (NO or Send) WH (NC or Rec) BU (L )
Type C, H
(L+) (Enable or NC) (L) (Enable or NO or analog output)
1 2 3 4
NSD0_01034a
BN WH BU BK
1 4
GN YN
BN (L+) BK (NO)
3
NSD01035a
BU (L)
proximity switches with NO contact
proximity switches with NC/NO contact
sonar proximity switches in M18 compact series
proximity switches with NO contact, pnp
Type D
1
GN YE
Type G, M
BN (L+)
1 2 3 4 5
NSD0_01037a
Type J
(L+) WH (Enable or NC) BU (L-) BK (Enable or NO) GR (Analog output) BN
1 4 YE GN BN (L+ ) BK (NO or NC)
Type K
1 4
YE GN
BN (L+) BK (NO)
4 3
NSD01036a
BK (NO) BU (L)
3 2
NSD0_01038a
BU (L)
3 2
NSD01039a
BU (L) WH (NC)
proximity switches with NO contact, npn
proximity switches with NC/NO contact, sonar proximity switches M30 K2 and M30 K3 compact series
proximity switch with NC or NO contact, pnp
proximity switch with NO contact or NC/NO contact, pnp
Type O
2 1 5 6 8 4 3 7
FS10_00139
BN (L+) WH (RS485) GR (RS485) PK RD YE GN BU (L)
PXO530/540 proximity switch BN = Brown BK = Black WH = White
BU = Blue GR = Gray GN = Green
YE = Yellow PK = Pink RD = Red
Pin assignment
M8 wiring for cable plugs and angular cable plugs
Type A, C, D
4 3
FS10_00140
Type B
4 3
M12 wiring for cable plugs and angular cable plugs
Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N
3 4 1
FS10_00142
Type G, M
3 5 2 4 1
FS10_00143
2 1
FS10_00141
Type O
5 4 3 2 8 1
FS10_00144
6 7
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/273
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Sensor assembly system
I Overview I Dimensions
6,4 55 6,4
2
22
FS10_00181
22
6,4
12 6,4
Mounting base 3RX7 322
50
31,5

Consisting of: Mounting base for sensor assembly system, with 12 mm hole for inserting round rod }
Order No.
3,5
5,5 12
3RX7 322 3RX7 326
Holding plate for sensor } assembly system, for mounting on 12 mm round rod, suitable for all cubic proximity switches Round rod for sensor assembly system, 12 mm diameter 200 mm long 300 mm long } }
72
3RX7 315 3RX7 316
Holding plate for accommodating 3RX7 326 sensors
2/274
Siemens FS 10 2009
FS10_00182
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Mounting hardware for all proximity switches
32SX6 281 to 3SX6 284
f d g e
NSD01021
Type Fixing clamp (molded plastic, supplied without fixing screws)

for proximity switches with thread M8 M12 M18 M30 } } }
3SX6 281 3SX6 282 3SX6 283 3SX6 284 a b c d e f g 26 22 11,6 3.5 16 12.6 7.9 (for M8) 36 30 18 4.5 24 18.5 11.9 (for M12) 45 30 26 4.5 32 19.6 18.0 (for M18) 58 30 36 4.5 44 19.6 29.8 (for M30)
Order No.
3SX6 281 3SX6 282 3SX6 283 3SX6 284
3SX9 910
Adapter
from Pg 13.5 to NPT , for proximity switches with Pg 13.5 connecting thread
3SX9 910 3SX9 918 3SB39 010CK
Adapter
from M20 x 1.5 to NPT , for proximity switches with M20 connecting thread
Molded plastic M20 1.5 screwed joint 6 mm long, with seal, for proximity switches with M20 connecting thread
3RX1 303
2 5
Alignment plate
for cubic proximity switches 3RG16 30, 3RG40 30, 3RG40 31, 3RG40 34, 3RG40 41, 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41, 3RG46 31
3RX1 303
30 30 30 100 70
40
NSD01023
5,5
60
3RX1 304
40 30 5,2 14
NSD01024
Mounting bracket
For snapping onto C-shaped rails, can slide up to 20 mm lengthwise, rotatable through 360 for cubic proximity switches 3RG16 30, 3RG40 30, 3RG40 31, 3RG40 34, 3RG40 41, 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41, 3RG46 31
3RX1 304
13 60 90 20
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/275
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Mounting hardware for SIMATIC PXS
29 5,5 61 2
Type Aligning unit with mounting bracket

for M30 Sonar proximity switch Swivel range approx. 20 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following alignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position.
Order No.
3RX1 301
70 84
20 27
NSD01025
50
NSD01026
61
5,5
Aligning unit with mounting flange

29 2
3RX1 302
70 84
for M30 Sonar proximity switch Swivel range approx. 20 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following alignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position.
Diverting reflector
for M30 Sonar proximity switch
62
NSD01028
3RX1 910
30 41
f d
34
76
NSD01021
Mounting clamp (molded plastic)

for Sonar proximity switch, M18 design for Sonar proximity switch, M30 design } }
3SX6 283 3SX6 284
3SX6 283
b c
3SX6 284 58 30 36 4.5 44 19.6 29.8 (for M30)
a b c d e f g
45 30 26 4.5 32 19.6 18.0 (for M18)
65
Aligning unit
for 3SG16 67 Sonar proximity switch
3SX6 287
80
NSD00782
52
For plug-in connections and cables see from page 2/268.
2/276
Siemens FS 10 2009
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Mounting hardware for SIMATIC PXO
Type
Mounting brackets for photoelectric proximity switches with M18 cylindrical enclosure Material: galvanized steel } Order No.
3RX7 301
18,5
NSD00953
3 20
40
40 3 12 6 32
3,3
18,75 3,3 6 14
Mounting brackets for photoelectric proximity switches in K20 or K21 design
3RX7 3080AA00
30
3,3
20 1,2
NSD00943
7,5
21
4,5
4,2
1,5
Mounting brackets for photoelectric proximity switches in K30 or K31 design Material: galvanized steel
3RX7 910
21
4,5
10 10
4,2
NSD00944a
42 33
4,2 4,2
16,5
8 8
4,5
21 30
49
7,5
Mounting brackets for 35 mm DIN rail for photoelectric proximity switches in K30 or K31 design Material: galvanized steel
3RX7 304
37,5
41
15
21
NSD00945a
21 30
4,5
4,5
Siemens FS 10 2009
2/277
Siemens AG 2008
Proximity switches
Accessories
Montagematerial fr SIMATIC PXO
Type
30 13 R25 R14 31,5 R62 137 5 26,5
Order No.
16
Mounting brackets for photoelectric proximity switches in K80 design Material: galvanized steel
63
3RX7 303
R25 34 63
NSD00950
R73
5,3
10
Mounting brackets for photoelectric proximity switches with M18 cylindrical enclosure, especially for laser proximity switches in L18 design Material: galvanized steel
3RX7 300
NSD00952
50
28
50
M 18
30
13
4,2x6,2 2
42
Mounting brackets for laser proximity switches in L50 design Material: galvanized steel
3RX7 302
NSD00951
48 19 49 24 10,5
4,3
7,5 4 23 32
4,3
7
2/278
Siemens FS 10 2009

Traductori de Proximitate PX PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Traductori de Proximitate PX PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Siemens AG 2008

Introduction IO-Link proximity switches

2/216 SIMATIC PXI400

2/102 SIMATIC PXO400 2/107 SIMATIC PXO500

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches SIMATIC PXS100

2/229 SIMATIC PXI600

2/239 SIMATIC PXI900

2/115 SIMATIC PXO600

2/65 2/66 2/78 2/85

2/170 SIMATIC PXI300

Siemens FS10 2009

Proximity switches for reliable sensing, counting, measurement or monitoring

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches

SIMATIC PXO photoelectric proximity switches

SIMATIC PXI inductive proximity switches

SIMATIC PXC capacitive proximity switches

Totally integrated in TIA

Operation and maintenance

IO-Link proximity switches

IO-Link product range

Components of an IO-Link system:

Expansion by IO-Link I/O modules

User benefit (example)

IO-Link proximity switches

IO-Link proximity switches

Time delay before availability tv ms

Degree of protection Ambient temperature During operation During storage

IO-Link proximity switches

PXS310C ultrasonic proximity switch

Rated operational current mA

View from rear onto device

Communication / Switching output

IO-Link proximity switches

IO-Link master module for SIMATIC ET 200S

I Selection and Ordering data

IO-Link proximity switches

IO-Link I/O modules

M8 and M12 connections

I Selection and Ordering data

IO-Link module K20

3RK5 010-0BA10-0AA0 3RK5 010-0CA00-0AAA

} Preferred type, available from stock.

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches

Sonar proximity switches from 2.5 cm to 10 m they hear everything

SIMATIC sensors Design PXS100 K0 compact range, 3SG16 compact form,

PXS200 PXS300 PXS400 PXS800 PXS900

Applications in food processing

Sensors for Ex Zone 2/22

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches

Measurement of stack height

Measurement of diameter and speed

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches

Sonar proximity switch

cm > 6 > 30 > 60 > 90 > 150

Distance b between two Sonar proximity switches and a smooth surface

Mounting multiple sensors

cm > 3 > 15 > 30 > 40 > 70

Sound cone Sonar proximity switch

cm > 15 > 60 > 150 > 250 > 350

Sonar proximity switch

Sonar proximity switch

SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches